Psion OMNII User manual
Reklama
Reklama
Omnii™ XT10 Hand-Held Computer
User Manual
(Windows
®
Embedded CE 6.0)
September 1
6
, 2010 P/N 8100190.A
ISO 9001 Certified
Quality Management System
© Copyright 2010 by Psion Teklogix Inc.
2100 Meadowvale Boulevard, Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9
http://www.psionteklogix.com
This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc., is issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Psion Teklogix manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated into new editions of the publication.
Psion Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not limited to consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, including but not limited to typographical errors.
Omnii™ is a trademark of Psion Teklogix Inc.
Windows
®
and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Psion Teklogix Inc. is under license.
All trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective holders.
Return-To-Factory Warranty
Psion Teklogix Inc. provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of twelve (12) months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of
Liability provided at:
www.psionteklogix.com/warranty
The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization. See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details.
Important: Psion Teklogix warranties take effect on the date of shipment.
Service and Information
Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services and information to its customers worldwide. Services include technical support and product repairs. To locate your local support services, please go to
www.psionteklogix.com/service-and-support.htm
To access further information on current and discontinued products, please go to
http://community.psionteklogix.com/login.aspx?ReturnUrl=%2fdefault.aspx
and log in. A section of archived product information is available online.
ABLE OF
C
ONTENTS
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
i
ii
Contents
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
4.3
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Contents
5.5.6.1
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
iii
Contents iv
Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
5.6
®
Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Discovering and Removing Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
5.9.2
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Contents
5.12.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
6.4.2
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
v
Contents
Docking station does not seem to power on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed.. . . . . .185
Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
6.9.4
vi
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Contents
Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
6.10
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
B.3.2
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
vii
Contents
viii
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Contents
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
ix
x
Contents
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Contents
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
xi
Contents
®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I
xii
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
I
NTRODUCTION
1
1.1 About the User Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 Overview of Omnii™ XT10 Hand-Held Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
About the User Manual
1.1
About the User Manual
This User Manual describes how to configure, operate, and maintain the Psion Teklogix
Omnii™ XT10 Hand-Held Computer.
provides a basic overview of the hand-held.
describes preparing Omnii for operation, including setting up your wireless network.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
describes Omnii features, including how to charge and maintain the battery, the keyboard features, the display, using the internal scanner, etc.
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
describes the Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Embedded CE 6.0 desktop and how to use it, outlines the basics of moving around a Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6.0 window, selecting and opening icons and files, and working with a dialog box. It also shows you how to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from
Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU Shell.
describes the Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6.0 Control Panel and how to use it to configure Omnii, along with scanners/imagers,
Bluetooth
, and so on.
This chapter also introduces you to the PsionVU program, which enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and
Control Panel, and lock down access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. With PsionVU and PsionVU
Shell you can greatly enhance your User Experience.
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
describes the peripherals and accessories available for your Omnii computer.
lists the specifications for your Omnii computer, radio, scanners/imagers, and battery.
describes the Omnii pinouts.
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
outlines the steps used to configure your radio using
Windows Zero Config
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
3
Chapter 1: Introduction
Text Conventions
details your bar code options.
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
describes in detail your imager’s settings.
1.2
Text Conventions
Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information.
Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.
Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.
1.3
Overview of Omnii™ XT10 Hand-Held Computer
Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer is a modular, industrial hand-held computer, running the
Microsoft Windows CE 6.0 operating system. A variety of options are available to suit material handling applications in warehouses, manufacturing facilities, ports, and yards, with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. Bar code input methodologies are supported by a variety of available scanners. Optimization for specific operational environments is also supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories.
Note: Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Psion Teklogix approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
Note: For hand-held computer and accessories specifications, refer to “The Omnii XT10
Hand-Held Computer (Model No. 7545XV)” on page 195.
Platform
• Texas Instruments
®
OMAP3
®
Processor, 600 MHz
• Flash ROM: 512 MB.
• RAM 512 MB
4
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview of Omnii™ XT10 Hand-Held Computer
Operating System
• Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6.0
User Interface
• Colour Touch Display 9.4 cm (3.7 in.) diagonal
- VGA/QVGA, 480 x 640 resolution
- High visibility version: superior sunlight visibility
- Extreme Duty version: withstands 1.2 joules impact
• Touchscreen
- Passive stylus or finger operation; pan and flick gestures supported
- Signature capture
• Keyboards
- Large selection of both alpha and numeric formats. For a list of currently available
keyboard configurations, consult your order sheet, or go to “Keyboard and Keypad
• Audio
- Beeper
- Rear speaker (optional)
- Integrated Microphone and PTT Speaker
- Supports walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk over PTT Speaker; VoIP supported over both standard Wi-Fi and PTT microphone/speaker.
• Vibration feedback available to indicate successful bar code scanning in noisy environments.
Wireless Communication
• Integrated 802.11b/g radio (CCX v4 certified)
• FIPS 140-2 support
• Internal Wi-Fi antenna
• Integrated
Bluetooth
®
class II, V 2.0 + EDR
• Optional SIRF III GPS Receiver
Note: 802.11b/g and Bluetooth are available simultaneously.
The following figures illustrate the main features of Omnii XT10—for detailed views,
please see “Features of Omnii XT10” on page 11.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5
Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview of Omnii™ XT10 Hand-Held Computer
Figure 1.1 Omnii XT10 Model with 59-Key Alpha ABC Keyboard
Figure 1.2 Bottom View (Docking Connector)
6
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure 1.3 Top View (Scanner Window)
Chapter 1: Introduction
Regulatory Labels
Laser Aperture
1.4
Regulatory Labels
Figure 1.4 Laser Warning Label
This label is affixed below the scanner window.
Warning: Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Figure 1.5 LED Radiation Notice Label
Thi l b l i ffi d b l th i d
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
7
B
ASIC
O
PERATION
2
2.1 Features of Omnii XT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2 Preparing Omnii for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.1 The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.2.2 Replacing the Battery Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.3 Switching Omnii On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.4 Resetting Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.5 Attaching Carrying Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.6 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.7 Configuring Your Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.8 Wireless Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.8.1 Wi-Fi Config: Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.8.2 Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.8.2.1 Authentication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.8.2.2 Encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.8.2.3 EAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.8.2.4 Verify Server Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.8.2.5 Enable OPMK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.8.2.6 Connecting the Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.8.3 Configuring TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.8.3.1 IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.8.3.2 Name Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.8.4 Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.9 Checking the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.10 Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.10.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.10.2 Using Windows Mobile Device Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
9
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Features of Omnii XT10
2.1
Features of Omnii XT10
Figure 2.1 Front View of Omnii XT10 Model with Alphanumeric Keyboard
Speaker
LEDs
Beeper
Display
Scan Key
Microphone
Symbol Modifier Key
FN Modifier Key
ENTER/Power Key
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
11
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Features of Omnii XT10
Figure 2.2 Side Views of Omnii XT10
Right Side Left Side
Vertical
Scroll Button
ENTER Button
Volume
Rocker Button
Scan Button
Battery Release Latch
Side Rail
Slot for Snap Module Arm
Figure 2.3 Bottom View
2
1 - Docking Connector
2 - Alignment Pin Holes
3
3 - M2.5 Locking Screws
(for firmly attaching devices)
4 - Hand Strap Slot
12
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
4
3
2
1
Figure 2.4 Top View
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Features of Omnii XT10
Laser
Aperture
End-Cap
Figure 2.5 Back View
Rear PTT Speaker
(optional)
Scanner Pod
Expansion Back
Camera Aperture
Scanner Window
Pistol Grip
Attachment Screws (4)
Battery Pack
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
13
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Preparing Omnii for Operation
2.2
Preparing Omnii for Operation
2.2.1
The Battery
Omnii is powered by a Lithium-ion Smart Battery pack, 5000 mAh—Model No. ST3000.
Important: Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty
Guide (PN 8000191).
Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking sta-
tions. For detailed information, see “Battery Details” on page 35.
2.2.2
Replacing the Battery Pack
Important: Always switch the unit off before changing the battery (see “Switching
Omnii On and Off” on page 15). If you do not turn the hand-held off before
removing the battery, it may be necessary to reboot the unit. Any active sessions may be lost.
Figure 2.6 Omnii Battery
Battery Top
1 2
14
4
1 - Release Latch
2 - Battery Compartment
3 - Guide Tabs
4 - Latch Tabs
1
Contacts
3
3
4
Battery Bottom
3
Note: If you are using a docking station or an external power supply, you can insert an uncharged battery and use the device while the battery charges.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Switching Omnii On and Off
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, a battery can be removed for up to 5 minutes without losing data. After 5 minutes the terminal may reboot.
Removing the Battery Pack
• If your unit is equipped with a hand or shoulder strap, unhook it from the base of the battery.
• Press the two latch buttons at the sides of the compartment simultaneously, and slide the battery out.
Installing the Battery Pack
• Slide the charged battery with the contoured plastic facing you into the unit with the contacts matching position and the guide tabs moving into the corresponding slots at the base of the compartment. Click both sides of the battery into place.
• If your computer is equipped with a hand or shoulder strap, re-attach the clip to the slot at the base of the battery.
Switch the unit on (see “Switching Omnii On and Off” on page 15).
2.3
Switching Omnii On and Off
Follow the instructions below for your Omnii.
Switching Omnii On
• Press and hold down the [ENTER/Power] key for at least one second.
When the unit is turned off, normally it automatically enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When Omnii is switched on from the suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to turning the computer off.
Important: If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:
The battery may be overheated (>60C°), a non-Psion Teklogix battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend
Threshold. See “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 110 for details.
To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery.
However, if you supply AC power to Omnii with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
15
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Resetting Omnii
Switching Omnii Off
• To switch off Omnii, press the
[FN]
key and then press and release the
[ENTER/Power]
button. Omnii will automatically enter the
Suspend
state.
Important: Turning off the hand-held does not result in a complete shutdown; rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When Omnii is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.
Important: If the word ‘FN’ is displayed underlined in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked “on” and Omnii will not switch off. Press the [FN] key twice followed by [ENTER/Power] to switch Omnii off.
However, if you’ve set the mode to “Lock” (see “Keyboard One Shot
Modes” on page 95), Omnii can be turned off even when the [FN] key is
locked ‘on’.
2.4
Resetting Omnii
To perform a warm or cold reset, you can access the menu by going to
Start>Shutdown
. Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcuts described below.
Note: If your Desktop is switched to the PsionVU Shell (refer to “The PsionVU Desktop
Shell” on page 70), resetting the unit is done solely by use of the keyboard
shortcuts.
16
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Resetting Omnii
Warm Reset
To execute a warm reset:
• Press and hold down the [FN] key and the [ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
A warm reset closes open applications; any unsaved data are lost. Installed programs and saved data are preserved.
Note: You do not need to reset your Omnii after configuring the radio.
Cold Reset
To execute a cold reset:
• Press and hold down the [SYM] key, the [FN] key, and the [ENTER/Power] key, simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
Note: As part of the normal Windows Embedded CE cold boot process, the screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end. The desktop is displayed after a few moments.
Bootloader
Important: This reset returns Omnii to factory settings.
To implement the bootloader:
• Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [ENTER/Power] key, and the [SCAN] key, simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
After the cold reset, the BooSt menu appears.
• Type ‘
1
’ to “Run Main OS” (continue loading the Windows Embedded CE operating system).
Hard Reset
Important: This procedure is recommended as a last resort, when all other methods fail.
To execute a hard reset:
• Remove the battery.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
17
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Attaching Carrying Accessories
• Using a coin, or other conductive item, connect pins 5 and 6 of the Omnii battery contacts for at least 6 seconds.
Pin 6 Pin 5
• Replace the battery and power Omnii on. The terminal will boot as if from a cold reset.
2.5
Attaching Carrying Accessories
Psion Teklogix recommends that a carrying accessory—a hand strap or shoulder strap—be
installed on Omnii before use. For detailed information, please see “Carrying and Protective
2.6
Calibrating the Touchscreen
Note: The touchscreen function can be turned off (see “Touch” on page 122).
The Omnii touchscreen feature is factory-calibrated and ready-to-go; however, over time the touchscreen's operating parameters may change, and it may need to be recalibrated for
correct operation. Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 44 for details.
2.7
Configuring Your Wireless Network
Omnii contains an integrated 802.11b/g radio module. The
Wi-Fi Config
application is used to configure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles. To configure the radio,
follow the steps outlined under the following heading “Wireless Networking”.
To configure your
Bluetooth
settings, please go to “Bluetooth® Setup” on page 125.
To see the radio specifications, please go to “Wireless Radios” on page 199.
18
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Wireless Networking
2.8
Wireless Networking
The
Wi-Fi Config
application is used to configure the Omnii 802.11b/g radio for one or more wireless network profiles. A network profile contains settings for SSID (Service Set
Identifier) and security options.
Note: In most situations, the configuration of your 802.11 radio will require parameter setting and access keys from a network administrator.
To launch the
Wi-Fi Config
application:
• Tap on
Start>Programs>Wi-Fi Config
.
The
Wi-Fi Config
screen is displayed.
2.8.1
Wi-Fi Config: Status Tab
The
Status
tab displays information about the wireless network to which Omnii is configured to connect. When there are no network profiles configured, this tab is not populated.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
19
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab
Disable/Enable Radio:
This button toggles between
Disable Radio
and
Enable Radio
depending on whether the radio is turned off or on.
2.8.2
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab
• To configure the radio for a wireless network, tap on the
Configure
tab.
Connect:
Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration.
Add New:
Used to create a new wireless network configuration.
Edit:
Used to change values in an already existing wireless network configuration.
Remove:
Used to delete a wireless network configuration.
Scan:
Used to detect and list available wireless networks. You can highlight a network in the list, and tap on
Add New
to activate the network.
20
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab
There are two methods available when configuring a radio network—you can either scan for an existing network or manually create a network. If you tap on the
Scan
button, a list of networks detected by the radio is displayed. Highlighting one of the listed networks and tapping on the
Add New
button creates a new profile that is completed based on the security capabilities detected by the radio. You may need to add additional information, depending on your network requirements.
If you tap on the
Add New
button rather than the
Scan
button, you can create a network manually.
Important: The steps below describe how to manually create a network. Keep in mind that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own network requirements. If, for example, you are using a different type of security for your network, the fields you complete may not match those described here.
• Enter the
SSID
(Service Set Identifier) for your network.
2.8.2.1 Authentication Mode
Omnii supports several classes of authentication—
Open
,
WEP
,
WPA/WPA2 (Personal PSK,
Enterprise, CCKM-WPA, CCKM-WPA2)
, and
802.1x with EAP
. Tapping on the
Auth. Mode
menu displays your authentication options.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
21
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab
Note: Each Auth. Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields appropriate to the authorization mode you’ve chosen.
Open Authentication
Open
authentication does not provide security. When this option is chosen, Omnii will connect to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network. If you choose this option, you can specify the type of WEP authentication—
Open
or
Shared
, the WEP security key length—
64 bit
or
128 bit
and the key type—
ASCII
or
Hex
. WEP
Key
fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point.
WPA & WPA2 Personal PSK (Pre-Shared Key)
When PSK is selected, either
WPA Personal PSK
or
WPA2 Personal PSK
—a shared key must be configured on both the access point and the hand-held computer. One of the following can be chosen from the
Encryption
drop-down menu:
TKIP
,
AES
or
TKIP+AES
.
802.1X, WPA & WPA2 Enterprise, CCKM-WPA & CCKM-WPA2
These authentication modes use
802.1X
with
EAP
authentication. When
802.1X
is selected,
Omnii uses
WEP
encryption with automatic (as opposed to static) keying. For the others, the user may choose
TKIP
,
AES
or
TKIP+AES
encryption.
22
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab
2.8.2.2 Encryption
The
Encryption
menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to protect transmitted data. Choose an
Encryption
method valid for your network from the drop-down menu. Only the
Encryption
options that are compatible with the type of
Auth.
Mode
you’ve chosen will be listed. In fact, in some cases, this menu will not be available at all.
2.8.2.3 EAP
This menu allows you to choose the
EAP
(Extensible Authentication Protocol) type used for
802.1x authentication to an access point.
The following EAP types are supported by
Wi-Fi Config
:
•
TLS:
Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
23
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab
•
PEAPv0-MSCHAPv2:
Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traffic.
MSCHAPv2
is used as the inner authentication method. This is appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains.
•
PEAPv1-GTC:
PEAP authentication using GTC as the inner method which utilizes one time passwords (OTPs) for authentication against OTP data bases such as
SecureID.
•
LEAP:
Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points. LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates. LEAP supports Windows Active
Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to off-line dictionary attacks.
•
FAST-MSCHAPv2:
Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against off-line dictionary attacks. Like LEAP, EAP-FAST does not require the use of server or client certificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains.
• Complete the fields in the
Configure Profile
screen. If you’re uncertain about some of the options, your system administrator will be able to provide the correct information for your wireless network.
• Once you’ve completed the necessary fields, tap on
OK
.
2.8.2.4 Verify Server Certificate
When the
Verify Server Certificate
box is checked, Omnii will verify the certificate provided by the authentication server during the authentication process. This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually installed on Omnii for the verification.
2.8.2.5 Enable OPMK
When used with compatible wireless infrastructure, Opportunistic Key Caching (OPMK) reduces the number of full authentications required when roaming. Only available with
WPA2-Enterprise (EAP) authentication mode.
24
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Wi-Fi Config: Configure Tab
2.8.2.6 Connecting the Wireless Network
Your configured network is listed in the
Configure
tab. An
[X]
next to a network indicates that this is the network to which Omnii will connect.
• Tap on the
Connect
button to activate your network.
The
Status
tab is displayed. The
Status field
displays
ASSOCIATING
while the 802.11b/g radio attempts to connect to the network. Once the association is complete, the
Status
tab is populated with the appropriate information about your network.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
25
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Configuring TCP/IP
2.8.3
Configuring TCP/IP
If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address.
2.8.3.1 IP Address
To assign an
IP address
for your Omnii:
• Tap on the
radio icon
in the taskbar,
26
or
Tap on
Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections
. Tap on the
radio icon
for which you want to assign an IP address—in the sample screen below, the icon is labelled
SDIO86861
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Configuring TCP/IP
The
Wireless Statistics
screen is displayed.
• Tap on the
IP Information
tab.
Figure 2.7 SDIO86861 IP Information Tab
Note: When DHCP is enabled, tapping the ‘Renew’ button forces Omnii to renew or find a new IP address. This is useful if, for example, you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your hand-held is dropped from the network.
To define a static IP address:
• Tap on the
Configure
button.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
27
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Configuring TCP/IP
• Tap on the radio button next to
Specify an IP address
to select it.
• Type an
IP, Subnet Mask
and
Default Gateway
address in the appropriate fields. Press
[ENTER]
to save your information.
2.8.3.2 Name Server
Note: If DHCP is enabled, name server addresses are assigned automatically.
• In the
SDIO86861 IP Information
tab (see Figure 2.7), tap on the
Configure
button.
• Tap on the
Name Servers
tab.
The DNS and WINS fields in the
Name Servers
tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers. The format for these fields is ###.###.###.###.
28
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Tab
2.8.4
Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Tab
Use Windows to configure my wireless settings
In the
Advanced
tab you can set Windows to configure the radio, using
Wireless Zero
Config
.
• Tap on the checkbox to the left of
Use Windows to configure my wireless settings
to enable this option.
Tap here to add a checkmark to activate the Windows radio configuration.
Power Save Mode
This allows you to set the 802.11 power saving mode of the radio to:
CAM
(continuous access—always on) (recommended); or
MAX_PSP
(maximum power saving mode).
Roaming - RSSI Threshold
This sets the RSSI threshold value, below which the radio will start scanning for new access points when roaming. Values range from
-55 to -90 dBm
.
Roaming - AP Delta
This sets how much greater (in dBm) the RSSI of a new access point must be than the RSSI of the currently associated access point in order for the hand-held to initiate a roam. Values range from
5 to 30 dBm
.
Concluding the Wi-Fi Configuration
If you’ve made changes in the Advanced menus, you will need to warm reset your Omnii.
• Choose
Start>Shutdown>Warm Reset
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
29
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Checking the Scanner
• A dialog box is displayed letting you know that you will lose all unsaved data. Tap on
OK
.
Once the reset is complete, if you checked the box next to
Use Windows to configure my wireless settings,
the
Wireless Zero Config
screen is displayed on the hand-held. Refer to
Appendix B: “Wireless Zero Config” for details.
2.9
Checking the Scanner
If your Omnii is equipped with an internal scanner, you can test it to ensure that it is operating properly. Point the scanner window at a bar code that your scanner was designed to decode —for example, a 1D UPC bar code or 2D bar code. Press the
SCAN
key or pistol trigger, and check for a valid decode on the hand-held’s screen.
Performance is improved if you disable all unneeded bar codes in the
Bar Codes
screen.
Review “Teklogix Scanners” on page 149 and Appendix C: “Bar Code Settings” for details
about bar codes.
2.10
Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC
Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC.
For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier, Microsoft
®
ActiveSync
®
connectivity software can be used to connect your Omnii to PCs.
If the Windows Vista
®
or Windows 7 operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is not required to transfer data between your Omnii and your PC.
By using a Snap Module or Desktop Docking Station with your Omnii, you can connect to a
PC with a cable and:
• View Omnii files from Windows Explorer.
• Drag and drop files between Omnii and the PC in the same way that you would between
PC drives.
• Back up Omnii files to the PC, restore them from the PC to the hand-held again, etc.
30
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Operation
Using Microsoft ActiveSync
2.10.1 Using Microsoft ActiveSync
Note: If you use a serial port to connect devices like Omnii to your desktop computer, the connection may not succeed because ActiveSync has trouble connecting at nondefault baud rates.
To work around this problem, set the ActiveSync baud rate on the desktop to use the same baud rate as the device. You can set the baud rate by editing the registry on the desktop host computer, as detailed in the steps outlined at the following website: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324466
To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the program’s setup wizard. Refer to the following website for details:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/activesync/activesync45.mspx
2.10.2 Using Windows Mobile Device Center
If you are running
Windows Vista
or
Windows 7
, your data transfers do not require Active-
Sync. Instead, you will need to download
Windows Mobile Device Center
. Refer to the instructions at the following website
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/en-us/downloads/microsoft/device-center-download.mspx
To transfer data between your PC and your hand-held:
• Tap on
Start>Computer
to display the drives. Omnii will be visible here.
• Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
31
G
ETTING
T
O
K
NOW
Y
OUR
O
MNII
3
3.1 Battery Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1.1 Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1.2 Battery Swap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1.3 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2 The Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.2.1 Regular Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2.2.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2.2.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2.2 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2.3 Function Keys and Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2.3.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.2.3.2 Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.2.4 Numeric Keyboards—Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.2.5 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.3 The Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.3.1 Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.3.2 Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.4 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.1.1 Battery Charge Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.1.2 Operating System Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.1.3 Radio Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.1.4 Scanner Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.2 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.5 Monitoring the Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.6 Uploading Data in a Docking Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.7 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.7.1 Caring for the Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.7.2 Cleaning Omnii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
33
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Battery Details
3.1
Battery Details
Omnii Hand-Held Computers operate by lithium-ion battery packs, Model No. ST3000.
Please see the following sections for detailed battery information:
•
Installation: “Preparing Omnii for Operation” on page 14.
•
Calibration and power settings: “Power Properties” on page 108.
•
Chargers and docking stations: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories” on page 169.
•
Specifications: “Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000)” on page 198.
•
Contact pinout: page A-4 of Appendix A: Port Pinouts.
3.1.1
Battery Safety
Important: Before attempting to install, use, or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory &
Warranty Guide, PN 8000191.
3.1.2
Battery Swap Time
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 5 minutes—you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame.
To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC. You can also save data in the “Flash Disk” partition of the file system.
Refer to “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 110 for details about
reserving battery power for data backup purposes.
The
Suspend Threshold
adjustment in the
Power Properties
tab allows you to determine the battery capacity at which Omnii will be shut down. If left at the default value,
Maximum Operating Time
, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose
Maximum Backup Time
, Omnii shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
35
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Charging the Battery
Important: If your Omnii fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:
The battery may be overheated (>60C°), a non-Psion Teklogix battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend
Threshold. See “Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 110 for details.
To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery.
However, if you supply AC power to Omnii with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.
3.1.3
Charging the Battery
Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithiumion battery packs must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. For detailed information on these accessories,
please see Chapter 6: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories”.
Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity.
3.2
The Keyboard
Omnii offers a wide variety of Alpha and Numeric keyboard layouts. See “Keyboard and
Keypad Kits” on page 171 for a list of available configurations. Most of the keys on these
keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, those differences are described in the following sections.
Omnii is equipped with an [Enter/Power] key that allows you to switch the unit on and to shut down the unit to
Suspend
or
Standby
mode. For details refer to “Switching Omnii On and Off” on page 15.
There are a number of modifier keys that provide access to additional keys and system func-
tions, as described in “Modifier Keys” on page 39.
36
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure 3.1 Keyboard Layouts
[SYM] Modifier Key
[SCAN] Key
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Regular Keys
[FN] Modifier Key
[ENTER/Power] Key
[SHIFT] Modifier Key
[Windows] Key
36-KEY Numeric 123 Keyboard 59-KEY Alpha ABC Keyboard
3.2.1
Regular Keys
The [ENTER/Power] Key
The [ENTER/Power] key is used to execute the usual Enter keyboard functions as well as to
power the unit on and off (for details refer to “Switching Omnii On and Off” on page 15).
The [SHIFT] Key
The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and to provide access to other symbols and functions on the numeric keyboards. Press the [SHIFT] key to turn the shift state 'on' (it will be represented by an up arrow in the taskbar), then press another key to access the shifted function of that key.
Press the [SHIFT] key twice to lock the shift state on (the up arrow in the taskbar will be underlined). Press [SHIFT] again to turn the shift state off.
To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT]. In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] +
[SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS LOCK mode off.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
37
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Regular Keys
The Arrow Keys
The [Arrow] keys are located near the top of the keyboard, and are represented on the keyboard as triangles pointing in different directions. The [Arrow] keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow: up, down, left and right. The left arrow key should not be confused with the [BACKSPACE] key which is depicted as a left arrow. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear.
The [BACKSPACE/DEL] Key
The [BACKSPACE] key (represented on the keyboard as an arrow pointing left) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the previous key stroke.
The [DEL] key ([FN] +[BACKSPACE]) erases the character at the current cursor position.
The [CTRL] and [ALT] Key
The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent. Pressing either key twice locks it 'on' (it appears underlined on the Taskbar).
Pressing the key once again unlocks it.
The [TAB] Key
Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.
The [ESC] Key
Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box, or activity.
The [SPACE] Key
The [SPACE] key is represented on the keyboard by a long, low horizontal line contained by a small vertical line on each side. Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters.
In a Windows dialog box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.
The [SCAN] Key
Omnii is equipped with a single [SCAN] key on the keyboard and an extra [SCAN] button located on the left side of the unit. [SCAN] keys activate the scanner beam. For units that do not have internal scanners, these keys can be remapped to serve other functions.
38
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Modifier Keys
3.2.2
Modifier Keys
The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] keys are modifier keys that change the function of the next key pressed.
The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.
[SHIFT] and [FN]
The [SHIFT] and [FN] modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions. The functions related to these modifier keys are colour-coded in white and blue print respectively above the keyboard keys, dependant on your keyboard format.
[SYM]
Note: When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (P/N 8100016), note that the [SYM] key is interchangeable with the [ORANGE] key.
The Symbol [SYM] modifier key is represented on the keyboard by the characters ‘SYM’ and provides access to commonly used symbolic characters. Pressing the key brings up the
Symbol soft input panel (SIP) onscreen keyboard, with symbols mapped to each key. If you wish to adjust the settings for the pop-up screen (e.g. time of delay before screen appears, etc.), modify the file
softinputpanel.xml
, located in the Windows folder.
Note: Modifier keys are remapped in the Control Panel, and the Symbol SIP will automatically show and use the new mappings after the next reboot.
The onscreen keyboard corresponds to the specific keyboard on your Omnii—either numeric or alphanumeric.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
39
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Modifier Keys
Figure 3.2 Symbol Soft Input Panels
Internet Browser Keys
[SPACE] Key
36-KEY Numeric Keyboard
59-KEY Alpha Keyboard
3.2.2.1 Activating Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed, it is shown in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen, making it easier to determine whether a modifier key is active. For example, if the [CTRL] key is pressed,
Ctrl
is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once the next key is pressed, the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar.
3.2.2.2 Locking Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed in underlined letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the [FN] key twice locks it on—it is displayed as an underlined blue ‘FN’ in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen.
The same is true of the [SYM] key, which is shown as an underlined orange ‘SYM’ in the taskbar.
The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off. Once a modifier key is unlocked, the underline representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed.
Note: The locking function of the modifier keys can be changed so that pressing a key
once
will lock the key ‘on’.
If you disable the ‘One Shot’ function of the key, pressing it once will lock the key
40
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Function Keys and Macro Keys
3.2.3
Function Keys and Macro Keys
In addition to the standard keyboard functions (see “The Keyboard” on page 36), Omnii
supports function keys and macro keys.
All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application. The TekTerm application utilizes these keys (for detailed information, see the
TekTerm Software User
Manual
, P/N 8000073).
3.2.3.1 Function Keys
Function keys perform special, custom-defined functions within an application. These keys are accessed by pressing one of the dedicated function keys on the keyboard, or through the appropriate [SHIFT] or [FN] key sequence, depending on the keyboard variant being used.
Alphanumeric Keyboard Function Keys
The Alphanumeric keyboards are equipped with up to thirty function keys, including those function keys that are colour-coded in blue print above the alpha keys or function keys (depending on your keyboard).
To access the blue function keys, press the [FN] key followed by the appropriate alpha or function key.
Function keys [F1] through [F24] can be used with the Windows Embedded CE operating system or another application. The additional function keys, [F25] through [F30] along with the macros, are not used as part of the Windows Embedded CE operating system.
Numeric Keyboard Function Keys
The Numeric keyboards are equipped with up to 24 function keys, including those function keys that are colour-coded in white print above the function keys. Function keys F25 through F30 can only be accessed by remapping another key to that function.
To access the white function keys, press the [SHIFT] key followed by the appropriate function key.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
41
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Numeric Keyboards—Accessing Alpha Keys
3.2.3.2 Macro Keys
Important: Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 97 for details about creating
macros.
Several of the Omnii keyboards are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like the [ENTER/Power] key, the [BACKSPACE] key, any function key and arrow key, etc.
59-Key Alphanumeric Keyboard Macro Keys
These keyboards have six macro keys: [M1] to [M6], located on the S to X keys (second-last row of keys).
To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key.
36-Key Numeric Keyboard Macro Keys
These keyboards are equipped with five macro keys: [M1] to [M5]. These keys are colour coded in blue print above function keys [F1] to [F5].
To access a macro key, press the [FN] key followed by the macro key.
3.2.4
Numeric Keyboards—Accessing Alpha Keys
On the Numeric Omnii keyboards, all alphabetic characters are printed on the unit plastic in blue typeface above the keys. Alpha characters are accessed by pressing the [FN] modifier key, then pressing another key on the keyboard.
The Alpha Modified Numeric 789 keyboard has each blue alphabetic character assigned as a single [FN]-shifted character on individual keys. An indicator in the left corner of the taskbar displays the currently selected character.
The Numeric 123 keyboards have telephone-style alphabetic keys, with the blue alphabetic characters located in groups of 3 or 4 above each of the numeric keys. To access characters on these keyboards, a few extra steps are needed, as described below.
Choosing a Single Alpha Character
Note: The following examples assume that the [FN] key is enabled as ‘Lock’ mode in the
‘One Shot’ screen (accessible through the Control Panel Keyboard icon). In ‘Lock’
mode, pressing the [FN] key once locks it ‘on’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot
Modes” on page 95 for details.
42
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
The Keypad Backlight
The examples below illustrate how to access A, B and C, all of which are printed in blue characters above the numeric key [2]. The letters you choose appear in the softkey bar as you press the numeric key, providing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen.
To choose the letter ‘a’:
• Press the [FN] key, and press the numeric key [2].
• Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off.
To choose the letter ‘b’:
• Press the [FN] key, and press [2] twice.
• Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off.
To choose the letter ‘c’:
• Press the [FN] key, and press [2] three times.
• Press the [FN] key again to unlock or turn it off.
Note: Keep in mind that there is a timeout of one second between key presses when sequencing through the alphabetic characters on a key. If you pause longer than one second between key presses, the alphabetic character that is displayed at that time will be entered.
Selecting Uppercase Letters
To display a single capital letter, press the [SHIFT] key first, then the letter you want.
To access CAPS LOCK mode, press [FN] + [SHIFT]. In this state, if you press a numeric key, the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key. Press [FN] +
[SHIFT] again to turn the CAPS LOCK mode off.
3.2.5
The Keypad Backlight
The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows Embedded CE
Control
Panel
. The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog
box. Refer to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 95 for details about this option.
Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
43
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
The Display
3.3
The Display
Omnii is equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed.
3.3.1
Adjusting the Display Backlight
The behaviour of the display backlight and the intensity of the backlight can be specified in the
Display Properties
dialog box in the
Control Panel
.
for details about the Display Properties dialog box.
3.3.2
Calibrating the Touchscreen
If your Omnii touchscreen has never been calibrated, or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the
Stylus Properties
dialog box in the
Control
Panel
to recalibrate the screen.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Stylus
icon to display the
Stylus Properties
window.
• Select the
Calibration
tab, and then choose the
Recalibrate
button.
44
• Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Indicators
3.4
Indicators
Omnii uses LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes), onscreen messages, vibrations, and audio tones as indicators.
3.4.1
LEDs
Omnii is equipped with four coloured LEDs. This section outlines what these LEDs indicate.
Important: If an LED is illuminated in red, the operator should be cautious as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission.
Figure 3.3 LED Status Indicators
1
2
3
4
1. Battery Charge Status
2. Operating System Status
3. GPS Status
4. Scanner Status
3.4.1.1 Battery Charge Status LED
The far left LED is reserved for battery charge status. This indicator is active even when the hand-held is inserted in a docking station (and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
45
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
LEDs
Table 3.1 Battery Charge LED Behaviours
OFF
Solid Green
Charge LED Behaviour
Flashing Green
Yellow
Solid Red
Function
External power not detected.
Battery charging complete.
Charge in progress.
Cell temperature out of range for charge.
Unable to charge battery.
3.4.1.2 Operating System Status LED
The second LED indicates system notifications and operating system status. It is also available for user-loaded custom Windows Embedded CE applications.
Operating LED Behaviour Function
OFF when unit is in Suspend or Shutdown.
Normal operating status.
Solid Yellow
Fast Flashing Yellow
Flashing Yellow
The unit is powering on.
The unit is in Standby mode.
This LED is controlled by the Sounds and
Notifications Control Panel applet.
3.4.1.3 Radio Status LED
The third LED from the left indicates the status of the GPS radio in the Omnii XT10.
Radio Traffic LED Behaviour
OFF
Slow Flashing Blue
Function
The GPS radio is disabled.
The GPS radio is enabled and active.
46
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Onscreen Indicators
3.4.1.4 Scanner Status LED
The fourth (far right) LED indicates scanner status.
Scan LED Behaviour
OFF
Solid Red during scan
Solid Green after decode
OFF when scan ended
Flashing Red
Function
The scanner is not in use.
Scan in progress.
Successful scan.
Unsuccessful scan.
3.4.2
Onscreen Indicators
The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators, including the Input Panel button if you have chosen to show that option in the
Taskbar and Start
Menu
settings.
Figure 3.4 Taskbar
The taskbar changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are displayed. For example, if a radio is not installed in your Omnii, the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
47
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Onscreen Indicators
Windows
®
Start Button
If you are using the touchscreen, you can either tap the Windows icon at the bottom left of the screen, or press the [Windows] key to display the Start Menu, and then tap on the desired application.
Modifier Key Indicators
[SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN] and [SYM] are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked. If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it, the key is displayed in the taskbar, for example, pressing the [FN] key once displays ‘FN’ in the taskbar. If a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked on’ and the onscreen indicator is displayed with underlined letters in the taskbar, for example, pressing [FN] twice displays ‘FN’ in the taskbar.
Power
The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides quick access to the charge state of the battery. Tapping on the icon once will show the percentage charge left in the battery.
Tapping on the icon twice opens the
Power Properties
If Omnii is using external AC power, an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar.
802.11 Radio Signal Quality
Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.
Good
Reception
Weak
Reception
No Radio
Link
Docking Device
When a hand-held is inserted in a docking station, charger or cradle, an associated icon appears in the taskbar.
Combo Charger &
Combo Docking Station
Quad Docking Station Powered Vehicle Cradle, Desktop Dock
& Snap Module
48
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Audio Indicators
Bluetooth
Radio
This icon displayed in the taskbar represents the installed
Bluetooth
radio.
Input Panel
You can tap the Input Panel icon to activate the soft keyboard application.
3.4.3
Audio Indicators
Omnii supports several audio options, including
Bluetooth
. The optional rear speaker can be used for system (Windows) sounds and .
wav
files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front receiver. The beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected, an operator’s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low. The volume rocker button is located on the left side of the hand-held. Infor-
mation on configuring sounds is detailed in “Volume & Sounds Properties” on page 123.
3.4.4
Vibrations
You can set Omnii to vibrate when a successful or unsuccessful bar code scan is performed.
See “Teklogix Scanners”, page 149.
3.5
Monitoring the Network Connection
The radio signal icon in the taskbar indicates the strength of the communication link with an
802.11 access point.
To access the radio signal icon:
• Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the wireless statistics dialog box.
To access the radio signal icon using the keyboard:
• Press the [Windows] key to display the
Start Menu
.
• Highlight
Shortcuts
and then choose
System Tray
from the sub-menu.
• Use the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] arrow keys to highlight the
radio signal
icon in the taskbar.
• Press [ENTER] to display the
Wireless Statistics
dialog box.
Note: Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session. At times, you may need to renew your connection by logging in again.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
49
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Uploading Data in a Docking Station
3.6
Uploading Data in a Docking Station
The Desktop Docking Stations allow your hand-held to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available. When Omnii is properly inserted in a docking station, a dock icon is displayed in the taskbar at the bottom of the unit screen. For detailed
Omnii before performing data uploads.
3.7
General Maintenance
3.7.1
Caring for the Touchscreen
The touchscreen is covered with a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating. The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
• mustard
• ketchup
• sodium hydroxide
• concentrated caustic solutions
• benzyl alcohol
• concentrated acids
If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (ST6112). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.
3.7.2
Cleaning Omnii
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.
To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only your finger or the stylus
(pen) supplied with your Omnii.
• Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.
50
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your Omnii
Cleaning Omnii
• Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. Omnii has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
• To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
51
W
INDOWS
E
MBEDDED
CE 6.0
4
4.1 Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.1.1 Navigating Using a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.1.2 Navigating Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.2 Working with Files, Folders, and Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.3 Using a Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.4 The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.4.1 The Desktop Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.4.2 The Taskbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4.2.1 Using the Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4.2.2 Customizing the Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.4.3 The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.4.3.1 The Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.4.3.2 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.4.3.3 Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.4.3.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.4.3.5 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.4.3.6 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4.5 The PsionVU Desktop Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
53
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications
4.1
Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications
Graphic user interfaces like Windows Embedded CE for portable devices and desktop
Windows (2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every ‘point and click’ action.
Windows Embedded CE supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference—the ‘point and click’ action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping. In those applications that support it, you can also flick and pan your finger to scroll through screens.
4.1.1
Navigating Using a Touchscreen
Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, the touchscreen
may need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 44.
Omnii comes equipped with a stylus—a pointing tool that looks like a pen. The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen. You can also use gestures with your fingers. You can use two gestures: pan and flick. Use left or right flicks to quickly move between tabs of a multi-tab control panel, or to scroll long lists of options. Use panning by touching and dragging a page that has scrollbars.
Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only a finger touch or the stylus (pen) supplied with your Omnii.
To choose an icon, open a file, launch an applet or open a folder:
• Double-tap on the appropriate icon.
4.1.2
Navigating Using the Keyboard
If you would like to use keyed input to choose icons and navigating dialog boxes, displaying
the desktop you can refer to Table 4.1 for a description of the navigation keys.
Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation
Operation
Switch between active applications
Open task manager
Move the cursor
Key or Key Combination
[ALT] [TAB]
[ALT] [ESC]
Arrow keys
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
55
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Working with Files, Folders, and Programs
Operation
Open file, folder or icon
Exit & Save
Close/Exit & Do Not Save
Navigate Dialog Boxes
Select Radio Button/Press Button
Go to Start Menu
Key or Key Combination
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
[ESC]
[TAB]
To move cursor up [SHIFT] [TAB]
To display the contents of the next ‘tab’ in a dialog box [CTRL] [TAB]
[SPACE]
[Windows]
Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, Omnii does not support key chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence.
Refer to “Working with Files, Folders, and Programs” on page 56 for additional details
about keyboard navigation.
4.2
Working with Files, Folders, and Programs
Figure 4.1 Working with Windows Icons
Folder
Program Icon
File
• Double-tap on the appropriate icon—either a folder icon, a program icon or a file icon—to open or launch your selection.
56
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Using a Dialog Box
If you’re using the keyboard:
• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon you want to open or launch.
• Press [ENTER].
4.3
Using a Dialog Box
A dialog box (like the samples in Figure 4.2) appears when you need to make selections and
enter further information. You can move between dialog items by tapping on them, or by pressing the arrow keys and the [TAB] key ([SHIFT] [TAB] moves the cursor backwards).
Figure 4.2 Dialog Boxes
Tabs
Radio
Button
Textbox
Drop-down
Menu
Button
Checkbox
Note: You can tap on an element in a dialog box to select or deselect it, display drop-down menu items, save your selections, and so on.
Dialog boxes contain one or more of the following elements:
Tab
: A tab separates different elements of a dialog box. Press the [TAB] key until a tab in the dialog box is highlighted. To display adjoining tabs, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key. To display the information in the next tab from anywhere in the window, press [CTRL]
[TAB].
Textbox
: A textbox requires that you type information. Press the [TAB] key to highlight the textbox and then type the appropriate information.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
57
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Using a Dialog Box
Drop-down
: This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the drop-down menu to indicate that additional options are available. Press the [TAB] key to highlight the menu, and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to cycle through the options.
Checkbox
: This box allows you to select or deselect an option. To select or deselect a checkbox, press the [TAB] key to highlight the checkbox, and press the [SPACE] key to select or deselect it.
Radio buttons
: These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options. For example,
in the sample screen in Figure 4.2 on page 57 you can choose to
Obtain an IP address via
DHCP
or
Specify an IP address
. Press the [TAB] key to highlight a radio button option, and then select a radio button by pressing the arrow keys to highlight the appropriate option.
Buttons
: This type of button allows you to
Save
,
Delete
and so on the options you’ve chosen in a dialog box. Use the [TAB] key to highlight the button you want to use. Press the
[ENTER] key to activate it.
Saving Your Choices
: Once you’ve made all your changes, press the [ENTER] key to save your changes and exit the window.
Note: A dialog box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not currently available.
58
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop
4.4
The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop
When Omnii boots up, the default startup desktop (Windows Classic Shell) is displayed.
Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately.
Note: The startup folder is located in \Windows\StartUp and \Flash Disk\StartUp.
Figure 4.3 Omnii Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop
To access desktop icons:
• Double-tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon, launch an application.
On the keyboard:
• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon, and press [ENTER] to launch the highlighted icon.
Note: If the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons, the desktop may not be selected.
Press [Windows] to display the Start Menu, and select Desktop. Now the desktop will be “in focus” and the arrow keys will highlight the icons.
4.4.1
The Desktop Icons
The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way as those displayed on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
59
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Desktop Icons
My Device
Choosing this icon displays the contents of your Omnii. If you’re not sure how to work with
Recycle Bin
This option temporarily stores items that were deleted, allowing you to either permanently delete or restore these items.
Internet Explorer
Choosing this icon launches Internet Explorer—a standard Windows Embedded CE version.
Keep in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the
Internet Options
and the
Network and Dial-up Connections
icons in the
Control Panel
.
Microsoft WordPad
WordPad
is a basic word processor used to create, edit, and print
.rtf
,
.doc
, and
.txt
files.
My Documents
The
My Documents
folder is a standard location for storing user-created files. The folder is located under the root of the hard drive on which Windows is installed.
Remote Desktop Connection
Remote Desktop Connection
is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal
Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine using the hand-held (Windows
Embedded CE device). “Remote Desktop Connection” on page 81 provides a website with
details about this option.
Shell Switch
The appearance and actions of the desktop can be changed by tapping on the
Shell Switch
icon, which activates the PsionVU shell. After switching to PsionVU, the desktop appear-
ance will be very different. For detailed information, please go to “The PsionVU Desktop
60
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
4.4.2
The Taskbar
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Taskbar
Omnii is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons through which you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit. If the hand-held is attached to a charger, cradle, docking station, or Snap Module, an associated icon is displayed.
In addition, the taskbar displays the application(s) currently running on your unit.
The taskbar also displays active modifier keys: [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [FN] and [SYM].
Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed with underlined letters. For example, if you have set the [CTRL] key lock to “on” in the Keyboard menu and you press the key, it is displayed as an underlined ‘Ctrl’ in the taskbar. (For detailed information on modifier keys and
keyboard options, see “The Keyboard” on page 36).
4.4.2.1 Using the Taskbar
A tooltip is displayed as each taskbar icon is highlighted. The tooltip provides the status of each icon.
If you’re using the touchscreen:
• Tap and hold on an icon to display the icon's tooltip. Double-tap the icon to open the
Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon. For example, double-tap the battery icon to display a dialog box listing the current battery capacity information.
On the keyboard:
• Press [Windows] to display the
Start Menu
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
61
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Start Menu
• Choose
Shortcuts
from the
Start Menu
, and then press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the sub-menu.
• Choose
System Tray
in the sub-menu.
• Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you’d like more information.
• Press [ENTER] to display the appropriate dialog box.
4.4.2.2 Customizing the Taskbar
To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require:
• In the
Start Menu
, choose
Settings
, and then
Taskbar
.
If you’re using the keyboard:
• Press [Windows] to display the
Start Menu
.
• Highlight the
Settings
option, highlight
Taskbar
in the sub-menu, and press [ENTER].
The
Taskbar and Start Menu
dialog box is displayed.
• Tap on the items you want to activate or deactivate. The check mark indicates active items.
If you’re using the keyboard:
• Highlight the options you want to activate, and press the [SPACE] key to select them. A check mark indicates active items.
4.4.3
The Start Menu
The
Start Menu
lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application.
• To display the menu, tap on the
Start Menu
.
62
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Start Menu
Note: Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work.
If you’re using the keyboard:
• Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item, and press [ENTER], or
If the menu item has an underlined character:
• Type the underlined alpha character. For example, to display the
Run
dialog box, type the letter ‘
r’
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
63
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Start Menu
4.4.3.1 The Desktop
Choosing the
Desktop
option from the
Start Menu
displays the Omnii desktop.
4.4.3.2 Programs
• Choose
Programs
to display a sub-menu of options. The programs displayed will be those resident in the
Windows\Programs
folder of the computer.
Figure 4.4 Program Sub-Menu
64
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Start Menu
This sub-menu allows you to choose
Command Prompt
,
Internet Explorer
, installed applications (e.g., Microsoft WordPad),
PsionVU Access, Remote Desktop Connection
,
Wi-Fi
Config
, or
Windows Explorer
.
Demo
This folder contains the
Demo Scanner
,
Demo Signature
and
Demo Sound
applications.
Demo Scanner
can be used to test how the hand-held reads and writes bar codes.
Demo Signature
allows you to capture a signature written on the screen with your stylus and save it to a file.
Demo Sound
allows you to record and playback sound files. The ‘Sample Rate’ and the ‘Bits Per Sample’ are the rates at which the sound will be recorded. Sounds recorded at the higher sample rate or bits per sample will be higher quality sound but will require more file storage space. Lower sample rates and/or bits per sample produces a smaller file, but the sound quality suffers. The record and play buttons operate the same as any recording device.
The
X
icon deletes the sound and the
diskette
icon allows you to save your sound.
Command Prompt
Command Prompt
is used to access the DOS command prompt. At the prompt, you can type
DOS commands such as
dir
to display all the directories in the drive.
Internet Explorer
Omnii is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows Embedded CE. You can access the
Internet Options
icon through the
Start Menu
under
Settings>Control Panel
or by double-tapping on the desktop icon
My Device
and then, double-tapping on the
Control
Panel
icon.
Microsoft WordPad
WordPad
is a basic word processor used to create, edit, and print
.rtf
,
.doc
, and
.txt
files.
PsionVU Access
PsionVU Access
allows you to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from the default Windows Classic Shell to the PsionVU shell.
Remote Desktop Connection
Remote Desktop Connection is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine using the hand-held
(Windows Embedded CE device). “Remote Desktop Connection” on page 81 provides a
website with details about this option.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
65
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Start Menu
Wi-Fi Config
The
Wi-Fi Config
application is used to configure the Omnii 802.11b/g radio for one or more wireless network profiles.
Windows Explorer
The Windows Explorer installed on your Omnii is consistent with all Windows Embedded
CE devices.
4.4.3.3 Shortcuts
Figure 4.5 Shortcuts Sub-Menu
System Tray
If your touchscreen is not enabled, you can use the
System Tray
option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon. These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide additional information.
• Choose
Shortcuts, System Tray
.
When
System Tray
is chosen, the taskbar icons become accessible. To display the dialog box attached to an icon:
• Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon, for example, the
Bluetooth
icon.
• Press [ENTER] to display the
Bluetooth
menus.
Cycle Tasks
When
Cycle Tasks
is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle through active applications.
66
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Start Menu
To cycle through your active applications:
• Choose
Shortcuts, Cycle Tasks
, or
• Press [ALT] [TAB].
Task Manager
The
Task Manager
allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task. To display the task manager window:
• Tap on
Shortcuts, Task Manager
, or
• Press [ALT] [ESC].
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
67
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Start Menu
4.4.3.4 Settings
The
Settings
sub-menu includes the following settings:
Control Panel
,
Network and Dialup Connections
and
Taskbar and Start Menu
.
Figure 4.6 Settings Sub-Menu
Control Panel
The
Control Panel
contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system and the shell. If your Omnii is running with the Psion Teklogix TekTerm application or another application, additional configuration applets may appear in the
Control Panel
.
Network and Dial-Up Connections
The
Network and Dial-up Connections
window allows you to configure the Omnii network
Taskbar and Start Menu
The
Taskbar and Start Menu
option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the
4.4.3.5 Run
Choosing the
Run
option from the
Start Menu
displays a dialog box in which you can enter the name of the program, folder or document you want to open or launch.
68
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The Start Menu
4.4.3.6 Shutdown
The
Shutdown
menu includes these options:
Suspend, Warm Reset
and
Cold Reset
.
Suspend
The
Suspend
option suspends Omnii immediately. This is equivalent to turning the handheld off.
Warm Reset
The
Warm Reset
option resets the hand-held, leaving all saved files and registry settings intact. Any unsaved data is lost.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
69
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The PsionVU Desktop Shell
Cold Reset
The
Cold Reset
option resets the hand-held (see page 17). Any files not stored in permanent
memory are lost; however, the registry settings are saved.
4.5
The PsionVU Desktop Shell
The appearance and actions of the desktop can be changed by tapping on the
PsionVU Shell
icon on your desktop, which activates the PsionVU shell.
Note: Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells.
Figure 4.7 Switch to PsionVU Shell
70
After resetting the Omnii, the desktop appearance will be very different. The programs are accessed with finger (or stylus) taps and swipes. If there are more applications than shown on one screen, a white animated dot will be present on the side of the screen in the direction of the next set of icons. Swiping the screen to that direction will move the display to the next screen.
Note: Although the Desktop appearance defaults to the “Ingenuity” theme, the theme is not changed using the
PsionVU Shell
icon. To change themes, open the
Shell Settings>Advanced
menu in
PsionVU Access
(see “Shell Settings” on page 115).
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
The PsionVU Desktop Shell
Hold the stylus or your finger on the Active Tasks, Favourites, or Notifications Bar, and swipe to the left or right to switch to the next screen.
Active Tasks Bar
Favourites Bar
Notifications Bar
A different program,
PsionVU Access
, enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. For details see
Active Tasks Bar
Open applications are shown in the top bar—the most recently opened is the first icon on the left. Tapping once on a program icon will maximize the application. This feature replaces the Task Manager of the Windows Classic Shell.
Date/Time Bar
Tapping once on the date or time will open the
Date/Time Properties
settings to enable you to change your settings and time zone.
Favourites Bar
The
Favourites Bar
replaces the Windows Classic Shell’s Desktop and Start Menu. These icons are the program shortcuts from your
Windows>Start Menu
. Tapping once will open the program. If you tap and hold on an icon, the application name is displayed.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
71
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Restoring the Windows Classic Shell
Notifications Bar
This bar shows the run-time program notifications for
Battery
,
Volume
,
Wi-Fi
,
Phone
or
GPRS
, and other notifications for the programs you are running. This feature replaces the
Taskbar of the Windows Classic Shell.
Desktop Minimized View
When an application is opened and maximized, the desktop view is minimized and the
Notifications Bar
is shown at the bottom of the screen. Tapping anywhere on the
Notifications
Bar
(except on the SIP) will restore the PsionVU desktop.
Note: In order to use the SIP, turn on the automatic settings in
Control Panel>Input Panel
.
PsionVU Access
The
PsionVU Access program
allows you to open a different program,
PsionVU
, which enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites
Bar and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer
and the system tray icons for security. For details see “PsionVU Access” on page 112. To
change your Desktop background, refer to “Shell Settings” on page 115.
To open
PsionVU
:
• Tap on the
PsionVU Access
icon in the
Favourites Bar
.
4.5.1
Restoring the Windows Classic Shell
The default Desktop appearance and actions can be restored by tapping on the
PsionVU
Shell
icon in the
Favourites Bar
.
Note: Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells.
72
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure 4.8 Shell Switch to Windows Classic Shell Desktop
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Shutdown
4.5.2
Shutdown
Turning off Omnii places the hand-held into a power-saving
suspend
state. In this state, all radios remain on, but the display, keyboard backlight and processor are switched off. When
Omnii is turned on from this state, operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to suspend.
• Press the [FN] key, and then press the [ENTER/Power] key.
Important: If the word ‘FN’ is displayed underlined in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked “on” and Omnii will not switch off. Press the [FN] key twice followed by [ENTER/Power] to switch Omnii off.
However, if you’ve set the mode to “Lock” (see “Keyboard One Shot
Modes” on page 95), Omnii can be turned off even when the [FN] key is
locked ‘on’.
Note: If your Desktop is switched to the Windows Classic Shell, the unit will display a
shutdown options screen before turning off (see “Switching Omnii On and Off” on page 15).
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
73
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Shutdown
Resetting Omnii
To perform a warm or cold reset, or boot to BooST, use the keyboard shortcuts described below.
Warm Reset
To execute a warm reset:
• Press and hold down the [FN] key and the [ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
A warm reset closes open applications; any unsaved data are lost. Installed programs and saved data are preserved.
Note: You do not need to reset your Omnii after configuring the radio.
Cold Reset
To execute a cold reset:
• Press and hold down the [SYM] key, the [FN] key, and the [ENTER/Power] key, simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
Note: As part of the normal Windows Embedded CE cold boot process, the screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end. The desktop is displayed after a few moments.
Bootloader
Important: This reset returns Omnii to factory settings.
To implement the bootloader:
• Press and hold down the [FN] key, the [ENTER/Power] key, and the [SCAN] key, simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
After the cold reset, the BooSt menu appears.
• Type ‘
1
’ to “Run Main OS” (continue loading the Windows Embedded CE operating system).
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
74
Chapter 4: Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Shutdown
Hard Reset
Important: This procedure is recommended as a last resort, when all other methods fail.
To execute a hard reset:
• Remove the battery.
• Using a coin, or other conductive item, connect pins 5 and 6 of the Omnii battery contacts for at least 6 seconds.
Pin 6
Pin 5
• Replace the battery and power Omnii on. The terminal will boot as if from a cold reset.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
75
C
ONFIGURATION
5
5.1 Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.2 The TekTerm Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.3 Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.4 The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.4.1 Control Panel Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.5 Control Panel Applications: Basic Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.5.1 App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.5.2 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.5.3 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.5.3.1 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.5.3.2 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.5.3.3 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.5.4 Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.5.5 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.5.5.1 Key Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.5.5.2 Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.5.5.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.5.5.4 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.5.5.5 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.5.5.6 Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
5.5.5.7 Lock Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
5.5.6 Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
5.5.6.1 Trigger Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
5.5.6.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
5.5.7 Microphone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
5.5.8 Power Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
5.5.8.1 Battery Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
5.5.8.2 Power Saving Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
5.5.8.3 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . 110
5.5.9 PsionVU Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
5.5.9.1 Administrator Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.5.9.2 Shell Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
77
5.5.9.3 Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.5.9.4 Control Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.5.9.5 Import/Export to File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.5.10 Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.5.10.1 Double-Tap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.5.10.2 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.5.10.3 Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.5.11 System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.5.12 Volume & Sounds Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
5.5.12.1 Volume Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.5.12.2 Sound Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.6 Bluetooth® Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.6.1 Paired Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
5.6.2 Device Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.6.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
5.6.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.6.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
5.6.2.4 Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.6.3 Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.6.4 Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
5.6.5 About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
5.6.6 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
5.7 Dr. Debug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.7.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.7.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
5.7.3 Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
5.8 Error Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.9 GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.9.1 Power Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
5.9.2 Profiles Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.9.3 AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.9.4 Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
5.10 Storage Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.10.1 Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5.10.2 Creating Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5.10.3 Partition Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
78
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.11 Teklogix Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
5.12 Teklogix Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
5.12.1 Bar Codes Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
5.12.1.1 Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
5.12.1.2 Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
5.12.2 Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
5.12.2.1 Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
5.12.2.2 Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
5.12.3 Translations Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
5.12.3.1 Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
5.12.4 Ports Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
5.12.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) . . . . . . .157
5.13 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
5.13.1 Creating a Backup Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
5.13.2 Restoring a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
5.13.3 Viewing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
5.13.4 Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
5.14 TweakIT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
5.14.1 Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
5.14.1.1 Advanced CE Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
5.14.1.2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .166
5.14.1.3 Advanced Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
5.14.2 User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
5.14.2.1 User Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
5.14.3 Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
79
Chapter 5: Configuration
Remote Desktop Connection
5.1
Remote Desktop Connection
Remote Desktop Connection
is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal
Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine, using Omnii (Windows Embedded CE device).
Refer to the following website for step-by-step information about setting up this connection:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/mobility/getstarted/remoteintro.mspx
or contact Psion Teklogix support services. Locate the office closest to you at:
www.psionteklogix.com/service-and-support.htm
5.2
The TekTerm Application
TekTerm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. Omnii includes unique features that support TekTerm—a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers. For detailed information, please refer to the
TekTerm Software User Manual
, P/N 8000073.
5.3
Pocket PC Compatibility
Omnii supports the AYGShell API set that allows Pocket PC-compatible applications to run on the hand-held. Windows Embedded CE includes application programming interface
(API) compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in units running Windows Embedded CE.
The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002-based applications and Windows
Embedded CE based devices:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/dncenet/html/WINCENET_CEPCC_App.asp
5.4
The Control Panel
The Windows Embedded CE
Control Panel
provides a group of applications through which you can set a variety of system-wide properties, such as mouse sensitivity, network configuration and the desktop color scheme.
Note: If you are uncertain how to move around a dialog box and make selections, review
“Using a Dialog Box” on page 57.
When Omnii boots up, the startup desktop (Windows Classic Shell) is displayed, and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
81
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
To access the
Control Panel
:
• Press [Windows] to display the
Start Menu
.
• Tap on
Setting
s>
Control Panel
.
If you’re using the keyboard:
• Press [Windows] to display the
Start Menu
.
• Highlight
Settings
in
Start Menu
, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to highlight the
Control Panel
.
• Press the [ENTER] key.
The
Control Panel
folder contains icons used in the setup of your Omnii.
Figure 5.1 Control Panel Icons
5.4.1
Control Panel Icons
The
Control Panel
provides a group of applications that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your Omnii. This section shows the related icons in the Control Panel and gives a
brief description of each. “Control Panel Applications: Basic Setup” on page 86 describes
the basic configuration for these applications.
App Launch Keys
By mapping keys to applications using this program, you can then launch those applications from a single key-press.
82
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Bluetooth
Opens the
Bluetooth
Manager which provides options for configuring various
Bluetooth
peripherals. It also provides the capability to use a
Bluetooth
-enabled cellular phone as a data modem to exchange information with other
Bluetooth
devices and provide network access.
Certificates
This program provides access to the Certificates Manager and Stores. The Certificates
Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificates Store, and allows you to
import, delete, and view these certificates. “Certificates” on page 88 directs you to the ap-
propriate setup information.
Date/Time
Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time, and Time Zone on your unit.
Dialing
Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and the code to disable call waiting. You can store multiple patterns—for example, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so on using this dialog box.
Display
Changes the display backlight and the appearance (colour scheme) on the unit desktop.
Dr. Debug
Provides both error diagnostic and troubleshooting tools.
Error Reporting
Allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.
GPS Settings
Allows you to enable and configure GPS operation.
Input Panel
Provides the framework for a Microsoft Soft Input Panel (SIP) should you need to design your own SIP, or change some soft keyboard options.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
83
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Internet Options
Provides options to configure your Internet browser. You can determine items such as the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet, the cache size, the Internet connection options, and the security level that is applied when browsing.
Keyboard
Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters. It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity, and many other functions.
Manage Triggers
Allows multiple-scanner trigger management, including the ability to configure each of the trigger buttons. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time.
Microphone
Enables you to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held.
Network and Dial-up Connections
Displays network interfaces and allows new dial-up and VPN interfaces to be created. It also
Owner
Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A
Notes
tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up.
Network ID
tab information is used to access network resources. (This information should be provided by your
System Administrator.)
Password
Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit. Once assigned, password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place.
84
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
PC Connection
Change Connection
button allows you to change the type of direct connection to your PC.
Power
Displays battery pack power status. (Alternately, battery status can be accessed through the taskbar.) Additional tabs allow you to determine suspend states and specify a suspend threshold.
PsionVU
PsionVU
enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and lock down access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. With
PsionVU
and
PsionVU Shell
(see
“The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 70) you can customize the entire look and feel of
your User Experience.
Region and Language
Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the hand-held screen along with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region.
Remove Programs
Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a program, select it and then click on the
Remove
button.
Storage Manager
Allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present, such as SD-
MMC flash cards. For details, see page 144.
Stylus
Adjusts how Windows Embedded CE recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid successive taps). In the
Calibration
tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the
Recalibrate
button and following the directions on the screen.
System
You can display the system and memory properties, as well as create your device name. In the
Memory
tab, you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
85
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Applications: Basic Setup
System Properties
Identifies the computer’s software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled.
Teklogix Imagers
The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings.
This icon is only present when the appropriate imager is installed. For detailed information,
see Appendix D: “Teklogix Imagers Applet”.
Teklogix Scanners
Provides scanner parameters and the bar code symbologies that the Omnii bar code scanner will successfully read.
Total Recall
Provides access to a backup\restore and deployment utility to maintain applications and settings over cold reboots.
TweakIT Settings
Allows you to change Advanced System Settings (interface, network, and servers), User
System Settings (display font size), and provides the Registry Editor.
Volume & Sounds
Allows you to adjust the volume of the sound emitted to indicate events like warnings, key clicks, and screen taps. You can also configure system (Windows) sounds and .
wav
files.
5.5
Control Panel Applications: Basic Setup
5.5.1
App Launch Keys
The
App Launch Keys
icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the application from a single key-press.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
App Launch Keys
icon.
86
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
App Launch Keys
To assign an application key:
• Tap the
Add
button.
• Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.)
The cursor moves to the
App
field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can
Browse
through the information in your Omnii until you locate the application you want to launch.
• Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on
OK
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
87
Chapter 5: Configuration
Certificates
The cursor moves to the
Data
field. You can use this field if you need to need to define command line parameters for your application. If you don’t want to assign any parameters, you can leave the
Data
field blank. If, for example, you want to assign an application launch key to launch the
WordPad
application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the
WordPad
application, you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the
Data
field.
• Tap on
OK
.
• If you need to Edit, Remove or Add another
App Launch Key
, you can do it from this final screen. Otherwise, tap on
OK
to save your
Application Launch Key
.
• To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.
5.5.2
Certificates
This program provides access to the Certificate Manager and Stores. The Certificate
Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificate Store, and allows you to import, delete, and view these certificates. Omnii checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that Omnii explicitly trusts. This option is used in conjunction with 802.1x authentication to enhance Omnii security.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Certificates
icon.
88
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Properties
Your Omnii has certificates preinstalled in the computer.
My Certificates
is the repository for the device’s personal certificate store,
Other Authorities
is the repository for the intermediate certificate store, and
Trusted Authorities
is the repository for the Trusted Root certificate store.
You can import or remove certificates, and view certificate information for any listing, including names, dates, serial numbers, etc.
For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client-side devices
(Omnii Hand-Held Computers), refer to the following website:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsserver2003/techinfo/overview/security.mspx
5.5.3
Display Properties
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Display
icon.
5.5.3.1 Background
• In the
Display Properties
dialog box, open the
Background
tab.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
89
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Properties
This dialog box allows you to customize your background image.
5.5.3.2 Appearance
• In the
Display Properties
dialog box, open the
Appearance
tab.
This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme.
5.5.3.3 Backlight
The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time. The
Display Properties
dialog box in the
Control Panel
allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the backlight remains on when the unit is not in use (no key press, scanner trigger, etc.).
Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
90
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
• In the
Display Properties
dialog box, open the
Backlight
tab.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Properties
Note: Backlight changes take effect immediately. You do not need to reset the unit.
To maximize battery run time, keep the display backlight brightness and active durations as low as possible.
Intensity
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii backlight. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity.
Bright For
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity after the last user action (keypress, scan trigger).
Dim For
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity (dimmed backlight) after expiration of the
Bright For delay and as long as no user action takes place (such as a keypress or scan trigger). At the expiration of the Dim For duration, the display backlight shuts off.
External Power Checkbox
When you select the checkbox next to
When using external power keep the backlight always
ON
, the backlight remains ON at the configured intensity when Omnii is operating with external power (not battery power). If Omnii is drawing power from its battery, this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in
Display Properties
dialog box take effect.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
91
Chapter 5: Configuration
Input Panel
5.5.4
Input Panel
Omnii is equipped with a Soft Input Panel (SIP). Shown below is the standard Microsoft
SIP, accessed from the Control Panel.
Soft Keyboard
Input Panel
Button Icon
Tapping on the
Input Panel
button displays a soft input panel (soft keyboard) that can be customized using the
Input Panel
dialog box.
Important: If the Input Panel button icon is not visible in the taskbar, from the ‘Start’ menu, tap on Settings>Taskbar and Start Menu. Tap the checkbox next to
‘Show Input Panel Button’. To remove this icon from the taskbar, tap in the checkbox to erase the check mark.
The soft keyboard operates just like a standard keyboard except that rather than pressing a key, you tap on letters, numbers, modifier keys, etc. on the Omnii screen.
To customize the appearance and behaviour of the soft keyboard:
Tap on the
Input Panel
icon in the
Control Panel
.
92
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure 5.2 Input Panel Properties
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
• Tap on the
Options
button to change the appearance of your soft keyboard.
Note: You can also display this dialog box by double-tapping on the Input icon in the farright corner of the taskbar.
Figure 5.3 Soft Keyboard Options
5.5.5
Keyboard Properties
This icon displays the
Keyboard Properties
dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the [FN] and
[SYM] modifier keys. This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Keyboard
icon.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
93
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
5.5.5.1 Key Repeat
Note: These settings apply when a key is held down continuously.
• In the
Keyboard Properties
dialog box, open the
Repeat
tab.
Repeat Delay
The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters. Sliding the
Repeat Delay
bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats, and sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time.
Repeat Rate
The value assigned for the
Repeat Rate
parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate.
Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you’ve chosen.
94
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.5.2 Keyboard Backlight
• In the
Keyboard Properties
dialog box, open the
Backlight
tab.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
Intensity
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii keyboard backlight. Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity.
Note: The keypad backlight maximum brightness will decrease over time as it ages. Use mid-range intensity settings when possible to extend the backlight lifespan. When the backlight starts to dim, use this parameter to make it brighter.
ON For
The value chosen from this drop-down menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on after the last user action (keypress or scan trigger).
Note: Tapping in the checkbox next to
‘When using external power, keep the backlight always ON’
forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power.
5.5.5.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes
• In the
Keyboard Properties
dialog box, open the
One Shots
tab.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
95
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your Omnii behave.
For each modifier key—[ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [FN], and [SYM]—you have the following options in the drop-down menu:
Lock
,
OneShot
, and
OneShot/Lock
.
Note: Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on. For example, if the [FN] key is locked ‘on’, the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays it underlined. If this key is displayed without the underline in the taskbar, you’ll know that the key is not locked. It will become inactive following a key press.
Important: Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.
Lock
If you choose
Lock
from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’ until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.
OneShot
If you choose
OneShot
, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.
OneShot/Lock
OneShot/Lock
allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed.
If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.
96
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
5.5.5.4 Keyboard Macro Keys
• In the
Keyboard Properties
dialog box, open the
Macros
tab.
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
A macro has 200 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys including [ENTER], [BACKSPACE] and [DEL] ([FN]-[BACKSPACE]), function keys and arrow keys.
Recording and Saving a Macro
You can program up to 6 macro keys, depending on your keyboard layout. You can also increase the number of virtual macro keys up to 15 using
Scancode Remapping
(for details,
see “Scancode Remapping” on page 100).
• In the
Macro
menu highlight a macro key number, for example macro 1, to assign a macro to macro key [M1]. Choose the
Record
button.
A message screen is displayed instructing you to
Enter Key Strokes to Record
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
97
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
• Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro.
• When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, press the key sequence: [CTRL]
[ALT] [ENTER], or choose the
Stop Recording
button.
A new screen called ‘Verify Macro’ displays the macro sequence you created. The
Save
button is highlighted.
• Press [ENTER] to save your macro, or highlight CANCEL and press [ENTER] to discard it.
Executing a Macro
To execute a macro:
• Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro. For example, if you created a macro for
macro key 1
, press [M1] to execute the macro.
Deleting a Macro
To delete a macro:
• In the
Macros
tab, highlight the
macro number
you want to delete.
• Choose the
Delete
button.
5.5.5.5 Unicode Mapping
• In the
Keyboard Properties
dialog box, open the
Unicode Mapping
tab.
98
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
The
Unicode Mapping
tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For example, the sample screen above shows “a (U+0061)” indicating that the character “a” is represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so on.
Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values.
All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the
Unicode Mapping
tab in order of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the
Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.
Adding and Changing Unicode Values
Important: Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard
Properties dialog box.
• Choose the
Add/Change
button.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
99
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
• Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list. In the sample screen above, a value will be assigned to virtual key 0 (VK 0).
• Position the cursor in the
Unicode Mapping
field, and type a
Unicode value
for the highlighted key.
Note: To add a shifted state, [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], press [TAB] to position the cursor in the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’. Press [SPACE] to select the shift state you want to assign.
Removing Unicode Values
• In the
Unicode Mapping
tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and choose the
Remove
button.
5.5.5.6 Scancode Remapping
A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro.
Scancode Remapping
allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents the [ENTER/Power] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume, etc.) or run a macro.
There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the
Normal
table, the
FN
table and the
SYM
table.
100
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
Note: When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide (P/N 8100016), note that the [ORANGE] key is interchangeable with the [SYM] key. Similarly, in the context of the scancode mapping tables, ‘Orange’ is interchangeable with ‘SYM’.
The
Normal
table defines unmodified key presses; the
FN
table defines key presses that occur when the [FN] modifier is on; the
SYM
table defines key presses that occur when the
[SYM] modifier is on. The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the
Scancode Remapping
tab accessed from the
Keyboard Properties
dialog box.
The first column in the
Scancode Remapping
tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column labelled ‘Function’.
If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number
(e.g., Macro 2).
Adding a Remap
To add a new remapping:
• Choose the
Add
button at the bottom of the dialog box.
The
Remap Scancode
dialog box is displayed.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
101
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
• Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled
Scancode
.
Note: The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping.
Virtual Key, Function and Macro
The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be remapped: Virtual Key, Function or Macro.
When
Virtual Key
is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be
on
or
off
when the virtual key is sent. If
No Force
is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.
When
Function
is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.
When
Macro
is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.
• Choose
Virtual Key
,
Function
or
Macro
.
• Choose a function from the
Function
list in the dialog box, and tap on
OK
.
Editing a Scancode Remap
To edit a scancode:
• In the
Scancode Remapping
tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.
• Tap on the
Edit
button, and make the appropriate changes.
• Tap on
OK
to save your changes.
102
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
Removing a Remap
To delete a remap:
• In the
Scancode Remapping
tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on the
Remove
button.
• Tap on
OK
.
5.5.5.7 Lock Sequence
The
Lock Sequence
menu allows you to lock the Omnii keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.
• To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to
Enable key lock sequence
.
• Tap in the checkbox next to
Keyboard locked at startup
.
• In the
Key sequence
drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you will need to type to unlock the keyboard.
Note: It is useful to leave the ‘Show popup message’ enabled (default) so that anyone attempting to use the keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.
A
locked keyboard
icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
103
Chapter 5: Configuration
Manage Triggers
Locked Keyboard
Icon
• Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.
5.5.6
Manage Triggers
Allows users to configure how bar code scanners and other devices such as RFID readers are triggered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Manage Triggers
icon.
• In the
Manage Triggers
screen you’ll see a list of trigger mappings.
104
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Manage Triggers
5.5.6.1 Trigger Mappings
A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application, the module(s)—sometimes referred to as “trigger consumer(s)”—of the trigger source. Along with keyboard keys, the external trigger (scan button) is software-based.
When the specified key is pressed, the owner (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.
Important: It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings—for example [F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice—even if the trigger type is different.
A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data, or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to applications.
Double-Click
When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between
0 to 1000 milliseconds), a double-click occurs. See also “Trigger-Press Type” on page 107.
Show All Modules
By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
105
Chapter 5: Configuration
Manage Triggers
Add
Tapping this button brings up the
Add Mapping
dialog (see page 106), so that you can add
new trigger mappings.
Edit
Tapping this button brings up the
Edit Mapping
dialog (see page 106), so that you can edit
existing trigger mappings.
Remove
Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.
OK
The
OK
button in the top right of the
Manage Triggers
screen saves all changes made. If the cancel button
X
is tapped instead, or the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes made will be discarded.
5.5.6.2 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping
These dialogs allow you to add and edit trigger mappings.
Trigger Key
This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the
Soft
Scan
,
Left Scan
, etc., for the trigger module selected.
106
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Manage Triggers
Note: It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers)—for example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/operations will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially with devices such as Imagers or RFID Readers.
It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer)—for example, two different trigger keys can be mapped to the RFID
File System.
Add Key
Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to this list, tap on the
Add Key
button. A dialog will pop up and allow you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.
Trigger-Press Type
You can enable either an
Up/Down
or
Double Click
response to a trigger press. Normally, when a trigger (keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to the “owner”—that is, the application receiving the trigger press information—followed by a
“trigger up”. If
Double Click
is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released, and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will have occurred. If a mapping with the type
Up/Down
has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of trigger events.
Module Trigger
This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
107
Chapter 5: Configuration
Microphone
Show All Modules
By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both active and inactive, are displayed.
5.5.7
Microphone
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Microphone
icon.
Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held.
• Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain.
• Slide the microphone tab to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain.
Tapping on the
Default
button sets the current microphone you’ve chosen to the default gain. Tapping on
Default All
sets
all
microphones listed to their default gain.
5.5.8
Power Properties
This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the unit’s battery capacity and allows you to manage battery use.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Power
icon.
108
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Properties
5.5.8.1 Battery Capacity
• In the
Power Properties
dialog box, open the
Battery
tab to view battery details.
5.5.8.2 Power Saving Suspend
• In the
Power Properties
dialog box, open the
Suspend
tab.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
109
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Properties
Power Source
This drop-down menu allows you to specify whether the unit is using
AC Power
or
Battery Power
.
Suspend Timeout
Important: Psion Teklogix recommends setting the Suspend value to 3 minutes. To further reduce power consumption, carefully consider the duration of time
that the display backlight is ‘on’ (see “Backlight” on page 90).
When Omnii is idle—not receiving any user input (a key touch, a scan, and so on) or system activity (serial data, an activity initiated by an application, and so on)—the hand-held uses the value assigned in the
Suspend Timeout
field to determine when the unit will go to sleep
(appear to be off).
When the time in the
Suspend Timeout
field elapses without any activity, the unit enters
suspend
state. In suspend state, the Omnii CPU enters a sleep state, and wireless communication is shut off. The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing [ENTER] wakes the system from suspend state.
5.5.8.3 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup
The
Suspend Threshold
adjustment tells the system when to shut down when the battery drains. If you choose
Maximum Operating Time
, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose
Maximum Backup Time
, the hand-held shuts off with more energy left in the battery so
RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.
110
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Properties
Important: Selecting Maximum backup time will reserve approximately 20% of the battery capacity for memory backup. Once the battery is drained, the system
RAM memory is lost and the unit must cold boot.
In most real-time transaction environments this is not a problem (it only takes a few seconds to cold boot). Batch transaction environments, where data is not saved to a non-volatile memory (such as an SD FLASH card), may need to pay particular attention to this parameter. Psion Teklogix does not recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM.
The Omnii Windows Embedded CE 6.0 environment does not store any critical data in RAM (such as the registry or file system).
If your application does not save data to RAM, Psion Teklogix recommends keeping the Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to maximize battery run time.
The
Estimated Battery Backup
is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect data until a charged battery can be installed in the hand-held. When the battery capacity is depleted up to the
Estimated Battery Backup
reserve specified in the
Suspend Threshold
menu, Omnii shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the computer. Once Omnii shuts down, it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle.
• Slide the
Suspend Threshold
button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours.
• Slide the
Suspend Threshold
button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes; this increases the Omnii operating time—the amount of time the unit will operate before shutting down—but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours.
Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the computer while the battery is swapped for a fully charged one.
Important: Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitors will preserve the data stored on Omnii for approximately 5 minutes. It is critical that you install a charged battery before this time elapses.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
111
Chapter 5: Configuration
PsionVU Access
5.5.8.4 Advanced
• In the
Power Properties
dialog box, open the
Advanced
tab.
Allow Suspend With:
This menu allows you to specify whether or not your unit will enter Suspend Mode while it is operating with an active PPP connection, network interface or active TCP/IP connection.
Low Power Warnings
The sliding scale at the bottom of this menu allows you to specify the remaining battery capacity at which a warning message is displayed on the Omnii screen, from 0% to 20%.
5.5.9
PsionVU Access
PsionVU Access
enables you to customize your computer settings, remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel, and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security.
Note: The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to the
PsionVU Shell either in the
PsionVU Access
settings (see “Other Shell Themes” on page 117) or by tapping on the Desktop icon
PsionVU Shell
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
PsionVU
icon.
112
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
PsionVU Access
Figure 5.4 PsionVU Settings
5.5.9.1 Administrator Password
By setting an Administrator Password, you can limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security. The default security setting allows
User access to all options, therefore restrictions and settings can be configured without setting a password.
Note: If a setting or restriction is configured without setting an Administrator password, the following message is displayed: “!Administrator password is currently not set.”
Once a password has been set, the message will disappear.
When an administrator password is set, the restricted options are accessed using a key combination. If a password has been set, the user would be prompted for the password.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
113
Chapter 5: Configuration
PsionVU Access
The option
Show Password
changes the displayed password from hidden (***) to readable.
When exiting the
PsionVU
application, the
PsionVU Access
dialog will come up that enables you to change from you current Access setting to the other (Administrator or User).
The computer must be reset following a change, and a confirmation will appear to enable you to continue or dismiss the change.
114
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
PsionVU Access
5.5.9.2 Shell Settings
The Shell Settings application has two menus:
Applications
and
Advanced
.
Applications
The
Applications
menu lists all the applications installed on the computer, alphabetically.
The items checked in this view are shown on the Desktop.
The
Add
and
Edit
buttons allow you to search for and add an application to the list of items in the selection window. You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the
Add
option will be greyed out and the following message is displayed: “!Maximum 18 entries reached.”
When you select an application and tap on
Edit
, you will see fields for
Command, Parameters
, and
Display Name
.
•
Command:
The
Command
field is prefilled with the path and name of the executable
(
.exe
) or corresponding link (
.lnk
). If the selected file can’t be found (e.g. external memory card has been removed, files have been deleted), a message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen: “These files cannot be found.”
•
Parameters:
The
Parameters
option provides the option of adding extra parameters to the application (for
.exe
files only, not
.lnk
). For example, if the
Command
field is running “pword.exe” (Microsoft WordPad), the
Parameters
field could specify a document to open.
•
Display name:
This is an editable field which is prefilled with the name of the application.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
115
Chapter 5: Configuration
PsionVU Access
Advanced
The
Applications
menu allows you to enable or disable some device functions.
Windows Classic Shell
The following options can be enabled or disabled in the Windows Classic Shell
Desktop theme:
•
Start Menu Bar
: If disabled, access to both Start Menu and Notifications are disabled. The Notification tooltips will still display. Any changes made will occur after a device reset.
•
Start Button:
If disabled, access to the Start Button and Notifications are disabled.
The Notification tooltips will still display.
Note: If “Disable access to the Start Button” is selected, but the “PsionVU Access by Key
Sequence” remains unchecked, you will see the following status-message “!A Key
Sequence is required when the Start Button is disabled.”, the checkbox will be autochecked, and the focus will be set to the key-sequence selection.
•
Notifications:
If disabled, the Notifications tooltips will still display.
•
PsionVU Access in Start Menu:
When this box is checked, the
PsionVU Access
program will be shown in the
Start Menu>Programs
list.
The following item is not optional:
•
PsionVU Access Key Sequence:
Sets the key sequence to open
PsionVU Access
.
116
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
PsionVU Access
Other Shell Themes
The following options can be enabled or disabled in the PsionVU Shell Desktop themes
(shown in the drop-down list as
Ingenuity
,
Active_Glow
,
Clear_Run
, and
Flip_Side_Blue
):
Note: The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to one of the PsionVU themes shown here—but by tapping on the Desktop icon
PsionVU Shell
(see “The PsionVU Desktop Shell” on page 70), the “Ingenuity” theme is automati-
cally loaded. The computer must be reset in order for the shell to change.
•
Use this picture as the background:
You can select a picture as the Desktop background.
•
Notifications:
If disabled, the Notifications tooltips will still display.
•
Launch an application Startup:
A window is displayed listing all of the installed and added applications. Any applications selected will startup after a reboot.
The following item is not optional:
•
PsionVU Access Key Sequence:
Sets the key sequence to open
PsionVU Access
.
5.5.9.3 Restrictions
This section deals with items that are by default available to users but can be restricted by an administrator.
Advanced
The
Advanced
menu lists the system features you can restrict or block.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
117
Chapter 5: Configuration
PsionVU Access
Notifications
The
Notifications
menu allows you to block or disable notifications.
5.5.9.4 Control Panel Settings
In these menus you can set which applets and tabs you want to
Hide
in Control Panel, and which applets and tabs will be
Accessible
as a shortcut icon from the Desktop.
• You have the option of setting the entire applet or specific tabs within the applet as hidden or accessible. Any applet that can’t be set is greyed out.
118
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
PsionVU Access
• You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the following message is displayed: “!Maximum 18 entries reached.”
5.5.9.5 Import/Export to File
This option enables you to
Export
your settings file (
.xml
), and save it in the location of your choice. In addition, an Administrator has the option to
Import
these settings from one device to multiple devices
of the same operating system
.
Important: A copy of this file should also be saved in a central repository for all Psion
Teklogix .xml files with a predefined name so that other Psion Teklogix utilities can locate it.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
119
Chapter 5: Configuration
Stylus Properties
Tapping on the
Export
button will display a “Save As” Export Settings dialog, with the default name
PsionVU_Settings.xml
, which the Administrator can change even after it has been saved.
The
.xml
file contains all of the PsionVU configured settings, including the
Administrator
Password
. When the file is imported to a device, the new password is applied immediately.
• Whether choosing to import or export files, the same file location options under
My
Device
will be listed. Following the action, a message stating the success of the operation and the location of the file will be displayed.
• With the exception of the password, changes made to settings will take effect only after a warm reset. If further changes to the configuration are made, they will overwrite the changes caused by the import operation. After importing a file, a dialog will appear to enable you to reset now or later.
5.5.10 Stylus Properties
Note: Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen appears to require recalibration, contact your supervisor.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Stylus
icon.
120
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Stylus Properties
5.5.10.1 Double-Tap
• In the
Double-Tap
menu, follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen.
5.5.10.2 Calibration
Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the directions below.
• Choose the
Calibration
tab, and then tap on the
Recalibrate
button.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
121
Chapter 5: Configuration
System Properties
• Follow the directions in the
Calibration
tab to recalibrate the screen You will be prompted to save the calibration data.
Important: If you do not receive a prompt to save your data, there could be a problem with your touchscreen hardware. Contact your Psion Teklogix representative.
5.5.10.3 Touch
This tab allows you to disable the touchscreen.
• Choose the
Touch
tab. Select the checkbox next to
Disable the touch panel
.
5.5.11 System Properties
This program identifies the computer’s software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their identification, version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
System Properties
icon.
• You can create a log (
SystemProperties.xml
) of your current components, which will be placed in the
My Devices
folder in Windows Explorer.
122
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Volume & Sounds Properties
• Instead of expanding each section of items individually, you can also choose to open all the lists at once by choosing the
Expand
button, which will then change to a
Collapse
button to enable you to collapse all the sections as well.
5.5.12 Volume & Sounds Properties
Omnii supports several audio options, including
Bluetooth
. The beeper is used for the standard sounds: key clicks, screen taps, and scanning. The optional rear speaker can be used for system (Windows) sounds and .
wav
files. When a rear speaker is absent, those sounds are routed to the front receiver.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Volume & Sounds
icon.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
123
Chapter 5: Configuration
Volume & Sounds Properties
5.5.12.1 Volume Adjustments
• Slide the volume button to the left to lower the volume or to the right to increase the volume.
• Under the heading
Enable sounds for
, enable the conditions under which you want the hand-held to emit a sound.
5.5.12.2 Sound Adjustments
This dialog box allows you to assign sounds to identify particular actions. For example, you can choose the sound your hand-held will emit when you close a program and choose another sound for a failed scan, etc.
124
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bluetooth
®
Setup
5.6
Bluetooth
®
Setup
Bluetooth
is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two
Bluetooth
-equipped devices come within a
10 metre range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because
Bluetooth
utilizes a radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate.
Note: The
Bluetooth
radio uses an internal antenna.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Bluetooth
icon to display the
Bluetooth
Manager
screen.
The
Bluetooth
Manager
allows users to search, pair and connect to other
Bluetooth
devices within their personal area network.
The
Bluetooth
radio is disabled by default. Before you begin the setup process:
• Tap on the
Mode
tab, and tap in the checkbox next to
Turn on
Bluetooth
. Tap on
OK
.
When the radio is enabled, a
Bluetooth
icon appears the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
It is ready for setup.
5.6.1
Paired Tab
This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services. The format of the name is
<Device Name>:<Service Name>. Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
125
Chapter 5: Configuration
Paired Tab
To learn how to scan for devices to pair, review “Device Tab” on page 127.
Note: If a service is actively paired and connected, the device and its services are displayed in bold typeface in this list.
• Tap on an item in the
Paired
tab to display an associated pop-up menu.
The displayed menu depends on the type of the service chosen.
Query Services and Remove Commands
•
Query Services
displays a
Services
dialog box where a pairing service is chosen.
•
Remove
unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab.
126
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Device Tab
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile) Commands
The
OPP
defines two roles—a
Push Server
and a
Push Client
.
Push Server
is the device that provides an object exchange server.
Push Client
is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the
Push Server
.
OBEX OPP
contains the following unique menu option:
•
Send File
displays an
Open File
dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected.
When the transmission begins, another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission.
HSP/HFP (Headset Profile/Hands-Free Profile) Service Commands
The
HSP (Headset Profile)
allows users to connect their device to
Bluetooth
enabled headsets and other audio devices.
HSP/HFP services
provide the following unique menu options:
•
Connect Audio
establishes an audio connection to the
Bluetooth
headset.
•
Disconnect Audio
disconnects the audio connection from the
Bluetooth
headset.
•
Volume Control
displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted.
5.6.2
Device Tab
In this tab, users can discover and display
Bluetooth
devices.
5.6.2.1 Discovering and Removing Devices
Scan
discovers
Bluetooth
devices in range of Omnii and lists them in this tab. Any existing devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
127
Chapter 5: Configuration
Device Tab
Clear
removes all
Bluetooth
devices listed except those with currently paired and connected services.
Note: To limit the number of devices listed to a particular type of device, refer to “Filtering
By Class of Device (COD)”, next section.
5.6.2.2 Filtering By Class of Device (COD)
This menu allows you to filter the displayed devices by their COD. If, for example, you choose
Computer
from this menu, only the devices that have the matching
Computer
COD value will be displayed. Choosing
All
lists all detected devices.
5.6.2.3 Device Pop-up Menu
The
Device
pop-up menu allows you to pair a device, update a device name or delete a device from the list.
128
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Device Tab
Pair
begins the pairing process by inquiring the services and profiles of the discovered device. An
authentication
dialog box is displayed the first time a
Bluetooth
device is paired.
Refresh Name
repeats the device name inquiry, updating the name. This command is useful if a device is listed without a name (unknown), or if a device name has been changed remotely.
Delete
removes this device from the list.
5.6.2.4 Pairing a Device
To pair devices:
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode.
• Choose the
Devices
tab and
Scan
for devices in your area.
• When the scan is complete, tap on the
device
to which you want to pair.
• In the pop-up
Device
menu, tap on
Pair
.
An
Authentication
dialog box is displayed.
• If the remote device has authentication enabled, type the PIN in this dialog box.
• To proceed
without
authentication, tap on
Next
.
After entering the device
PIN
, the
Services
dialog appears with a list of services available for that device.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
129
Chapter 5: Configuration
Device Tab
• Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it.
• Click on
Done
.
Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box.
Serial Profile
is an example.
This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling
Encryption
and selecting four different
Modes
:
Serial
,
ActiveSync, Scanner
, and
Printer Port
.
Serial
is used for simple serial port communication.
ActiveSync
is for ActiveSync-over-
Bluetooth
.
Scanner
is used to create a connection to a bar code scanner. A serial connection is created, then the
Scanner Services
is notified of the connection so that the incoming bar code scan will be forwarded to
Scanner Services
directly.
130
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Servers Tab
Printer Port
must be chosen here if you want to communicate with a paired
Bluetooth
printer. For further details, see “Mode Tab” on page 132.
• Once you’ve completed the information, tap on
Next
and then in the
Services
screen, click on
Done
.
5.6.3
Servers Tab
When a remote
Bluetooth
device initiates a
Bluetooth
connection to Omnii, the remote device is considered the ‘
Bluetooth
master’ and the hand-held, the ‘
Bluetooth
slave’. In order for the remote device to connect to the hand-held, Omnii must offer a service in the form of a server. The
Servers
tab allows these services to be enabled and configured. There are three server services available:
Serial
,
Scanner
and
OBEX OPP
.
Serial
server enables the Serial Port Profile server; a Serial Port can be selected from the drop-down menu.
You can assign either a BSP or a COM prefix from the drop-down menu. BSP (
Bluetooth
Serial Port) was created by Microsoft to allow
Bluetooth
to have its own serial prefix in order to free up virtual COM prefixes as these are limited and are widely used.
Note: Even after a Serial Port Profile server is created, an application must open the created port before a remote device can connect.
Scanner
server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service
(SCS). This is used for
Bluetooth
bar code scanners that operate in client mode. SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
131
Chapter 5: Configuration
Mode Tab
OBEX OPP
server enables the Object Push Profile server. A warm reset must be performed on Omnii after a change is made to this option. The OPP Server allows other
Bluetooth
devices to send files to this device.
• Tap on the checkbox to activate the server.
5.6.4
Mode Tab
Turn on
Bluetooth
activates the
Bluetooth
radio.
Discoverable
determines whether Omnii is visible or invisible to other devices.
Printer Port
allows you to assign and enable a virtual outgoing COM port selected from the drop-down menu to communicate with a paired
Bluetooth
printer. Keep in mind that when a port is chosen, the printer must be on and connected to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect.
• Select a port within the
Printer Port
drop-down list, e.g.
BSP1:
• Check the
Printer Port
check box.
• Open the
Device
tab and tap on
Scan
.
• Tap-and-hold each
Bluetooth
Printer device entry and then select
Pair
, key-in the Passcode (if needed) and then tap
Done
. DO NOT select any services!
• Close the
Bluetooth
Manager.
• Select the
Bluetooth
device to print to—you will need to key-in (or programmatically raise) the following key sequence [CTRL] [ALT] [F1] .
• You can now select the
Bluetooth
device to which you wish to print.
132
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
About Tab
5.6.5
About Tab
Device Name
displays the broadcasted name of the hand-held. The name can be changed in the
System Properties
applet:
Start>Settings>Control Panel>System icon>Device Name tab
.
Local Address
displays the MAC address (BD_Addr) of the
Bluetooth
chip.
HCI Version & LMP Version
display the version of the chip firmware.
Component
indicates the version of the Psion Teklogix
Bluetooth
Subsystem (the manager, drivers, etc).
Profiles
lists the supported profiles on this specific Omnii.
5.6.6
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
The following steps describe how to set up an Internet data connection using a GSM cellular telephone with Bluetooth. Omnii communicates via Bluetooth to the cell phone, which then accesses a WAN (Wide Area Network) and transfers data using GPRS.
1. Enable the
Dial-Up Networking service
in the cell phone.
2. Make the phone
discoverable
.
3. Pair the phone service with the Omnii Dial-Up Networking service using the
Bluetooth Manager
. (For instructions on pairing devices, refer to “Pairing a
4. To set up the Internet parameters, choose the
Network And Dial-up Connections
icon from the
Control Panel
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
133
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
5. Tap on
Make New Connection
.
6. In the
Make New Connection
dialog box, choose
Dial-Up Connection
. Enter a name for your GPRS network connection.
7. Choose the
Next
button to display the
Modem
dialog box.
134
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
8. In the drop-down menu labelled
Select a modem
, choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect, and then choose the
Configure
button to display the
Device Properties
dialog box.
Omnii communicates via
Bluetooth
to your
Bluetooth
equipped cellular telephone and retrieves the parameters for the
Device Properties
dialog box. Omnii then disconnects.
9. Under the
Call Options
tab, turn off
Cancel the call if not connected within,
and press [ENTER] to save your changes.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
135
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
10. In the
Modem
dialog box, choose the
Next
button to display the
Phone Number
dialog box.
The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent. Once you’ve specified all the necessary information, choose the
Finish
button.
11. In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Dialing
icon.
12. The values in the
Dialing Properties
dialog box need to be edited according to your network carrier specifications.
136
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection
Once you’ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements, press
[ENTER]
to save your changes.
13. At this point, return to the
Control Panel,
and choose the
Network and Dial-up
Connections
icon.
14. In the network connection window, the new network configuration—in this case,
New Connection
is displayed. Tap on the
new
icon.
When you tap on your new connection, an onscreen message indicates the status of your connection:
connected
,
disconnected
,
error messages
, and so on.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
137
Chapter 5: Configuration
Dr. Debug
5.7
Dr. Debug
Dr. Debug
is an error diagnostic and troubleshooting tool.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
>
Control Panel
. Tap on the
Dr. Debug
icon.
5.7.1
Status
This tab indicates the status (on/off) of the debug engines. Tapping on
Browse logs
displays error logs for your review. The logs should be used as reference when working with Psion
Teklogix Technical Support personnel.
138
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Settings
Pairing a Device
5.7.2
Settings
• Choose an
Error Level
from the drop-down menu.
• To change the location where debug information will be stored, tap on the button to the right of the
Log Folder
option.
5.7.3
Utilities
The
Utilities
tab is used to log network traffic. When you tap on the
Start
button, debug data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a Psion Teklogix technician for evaluation.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
139
Chapter 5: Configuration
Error Reporting
5.8
Error Reporting
Error Reporting
allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
>
Control Panel
>
Error Reporting
icon to access your options.
5.9
GPS (Global Positioning System) Settings
This applet allows you to define how the GPS module operates. You can determine when the
GPS module is powered and operating, and choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem. You can also set up AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System).
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Control Panel>GPS Settings
icon.
5.9.1
Power Tab
This tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves. The
GPS Power
drop-down menu is used to control when the GPS is powered on and off.
•
Off
– the GPS module is left off, always.
140
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Profiles Tab
•
Always on
– the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of the hand-held (suspend or standby).
•
On, and off in suspend
– the GPS module is powered on, but if Omnii is in suspend mode, the GPS module is turned off.
5.9.2
Profiles Tab
Tapping on the
GPS Profile Selection
drop-down menu allows you to choose an appropriate profile:
Default
,
Automotive
or
Pedestrian
.
•
Default
profile is a good general profile suitable for most uses.
•
Automotive
profile is designed for in-vehicle use, providing quick location updates as the vehicle moves. When the GPS module is set to this profile and the vehicle enters an area such as a tunnel where satellite coverage is interrupted, it
will
attempt to predict the vehicle position.
•
Pedestrian
profile is designed for those using the GPS module while walking. It takes into account the slower pace of the pedestrian when mapping the location of the user.
When the GPS module is set to this profile and the operator moves into an area where satellite coverage is interrupted, the GPS module
will not
attempt to predict the operator’s movement.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
141
Chapter 5: Configuration
AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) Tab
5.9.3
AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning System) Tab
To determine your location, a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites in fixed orbit around the Earth. The GPS module triangulates your location based on the time it takes for signals to get to and from the satellites. This works well in fairly clear areas, outdoors for example. However, if you’re attempting to triangulate your location in city centres where signals bounce off tall concrete buildings or from within a building, the GPS module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix.
AGPS reduces Time To First Fix (TTFF) and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping a fix in poor coverage areas such as indoor sites. AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris (orbital) data to Omnii periodically through Wi-Fi. The downloaded data is used by the GPS module to speed the process of getting a fix.
Update
• Click on the
Update
button to download
Extended Ephemeris (EE)
files from a secure host on the Internet using any interface that has an Internet connection. These files contain several days worth of ephemeris (orbital) data that can be used if the satellite’s broadcast ephemeris is not available.
The
Status
field above the
Update
button displays the progress of the download, and once successfully downloaded, the
Status
field will read
Idle
.
Settings
• Click on the
Settings
button to define the
AGPS server connection settings
.
142
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Info Tab
The
AGPS server connection settings
drop-down menu allows you to choose from two settings:
Use default settings
and
Use custom settings
.
The
Use default settings
option is generally acceptable for most applications. Note that aside from the
Update
field in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your Omnii, the field values cannot be edited.
The
Use custom settings
option is generally used to configure devices that will have access only to an
intranet
rather than the
Internet
and should only be altered with the assistance of qualified Psion Teklogix personnel. They will be able to help you configure your Psion Teklogix device(s) and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data.
5.9.4
Info Tab
This tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version, the date on which files were last updated, and so on. If GPS module support service is re-
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
143
Chapter 5: Configuration
Storage Manager
quired, you may be asked to tap on the
Save
button in this tab and forward the information to Psion Teklogix support staff.
5.10
Storage Manager
The Storage Manager allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present in Omnii, such as SD-MMC flash cards and Compact Flash cards.
5.10.1 Formatting a Memory Card
Formatting a memory card bulk-erases it. Once a card is erased, partitions may be created in it, similarly to those on a hard drive. Memory-card devices are normally ‘mounted’ (made available to the system) automatically when they are inserted. They must be dismounted before they can be formatted.
To format an entire memory card:
1. Select
Start> Settings>Control Panel
.
2. In Control Panel, double-click on the
Storage Manager
icon. The Storage Manager menu opens:
3. Select the memory card from the drop-down list.
144
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating Partitions
4. Press the
Dismount
button to dismount the memory card. All partitions on the card will be dismounted.
5. Press the
Format
button to format the memory card.
All partitions and information on the card will be erased during the formatting process.
5.10.2 Creating Partitions
Once the card is formatted, new partitions can be created in it. The default is to create one partition that occupies the whole card, but a card can be divided into more than one partition if desired. Each partition appears as a separate folder in Windows Explorer.
To create new partitions:
1. Press the
New
button next to the
Partitions
list box. The Create New Partition dialog box appears:
2. Type a name for the partition.
3. If more than one partition is desired, uncheck the
Use All Available Diskspace
checkbox, then specify the desired number of sectors to be used by the partition.
4. Press
OK
. The new partition appears in the
Partitions
list.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
145
Chapter 5: Configuration
Partition Management
The new partition is automatically mounted. This is indicated by an asterisk (*) next to its name in the partition list. Any unallocated space on the card is indicated at the left, and additional partitions can be created in it.
5.10.3 Partition Management
Partitions can be individually dismounted, mounted, deleted, or formatted as well. These and additional tasks are available from the
Partition Properties
dialog:
To dismount a partition:
1. Choose the desired partition.
2. Tap the
Properties
button. The
Partition Properties
dialog appears.
3. Tap the
Dismount
button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list.
146
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Partition Management
To delete a partition:
1. Select the desired partition.
2. Tap the
Delete
button. A warning dialog appears.
3. Tap the
OK
button. The partition is deleted.
To format a partition:
1. Choose the desired partition.
2. Tap the
Properties
button. The
Partition Properties
dialog appears.
3. Tap the
Dismount
button. The partition is dismounted. The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list.
4. Tap the
Format
button. The
Format
dialog appears:
5. Choose your format options. These options include:
• Version of file system (FAT-16, for devices holding up to 4 GB; or FAT-32, for devices containing up to 32 GB).
• Number of FATs (File-Allocation Tables).
• Number of entries allowed in the root directory.
• Cluster size (.5 KB to 64 KB).
There are also two checkboxes, which govern:
• Whether to use the transaction-safe FAT file system (TFAT). This file system keeps multiple copies of the file-allocation table, changing one while maintaining another as a backup.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
147
Chapter 5: Configuration
Teklogix Imagers
• Whether to perform a quick format. Quick formatting removes all reference to data in the partition without erasing the actual partition. The partition will be treated as empty, and new data will overwrite it.
6. Tap
Start
. The partition is formatted.
To mount a partition:
1. Choose the desired partition.
2. Tap the
Properties
button. The
Partition Properties
dialog appears.
3. Tap the
Mount
button. The partition is mounted. The asterisk appears next to its name in the partitions list.
The Partition Properties dialog has buttons for additional functions. Partitions can be defragmented, and their file structure can be scanned.
5.11
Teklogix Imagers
The Teklogix Imagers applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings.
The principle uses of the applet are to decode bar codes and to capture images. A
Demonstration Application
is provided to demonstrate how the imager works. Refer to “Demo” on page 65 for details.
Refer to Appendix D: “Teklogix Imagers Applet” for configuration details.
To launch this applet:
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Teklogix Imagers
icon.
Note: This icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii.
If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present, additional software (ICS) may need to be installed.
To enable a newly-installed imager, Press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
148
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Teklogix Scanners
5.12
Teklogix Scanners
The
Teklogix Scanners
icon in the
Control Panel
provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor bar code scanner configuration and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize.
The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit.
Note: To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter 7:
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
149
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bar Codes Tab
5.12.1 Bar Codes Tab
5.12.1.1 Scanner
The drop-down menu to the right of the
Scanner
option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types, depending on what is installed in/on your hand-held:
Decoded
(internal),
Decoded
(Intermec ISCP),
Imager
and
Non-decoded
.
The symbologies listed in the
Barcodes
tab change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it supports. Always defer to your bar code scanner’s programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter.
Note: Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. The type of scanner installed can be determined from the
System
icon in the Control
Panel, under the System Properties tab.
Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to ‘on’) only those codes that are required by the application.
For information on configuring the bar code symbologies, see Appendix C:
Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes.
5.12.1.2 Restoring Default Settings
If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters or all scanner parameters.
150
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bar Codes Tab
• Press and hold on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop-up menu.
• Choose
Default subtree
to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or choose
Default all settings
to reset all scanner parameters to default settings.
To reset a single parameter to its default setting:
• Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset.
• Choose
Default parameter
to reset the parameter to the default setting.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
151
Chapter 5: Configuration
Options Tab
5.12.2 Options Tab
This tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters and the display options associated with your scanner.
5.12.2.1 Double Click Parameters
Click Time (msec)
This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this feature.
A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, doubleclicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.
Click Data
This parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your Omnii following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Pressing the [ESC] key in this dialog box resets the data to zero.
152
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Options Tab
5.12.2.2 Display Parameters
Scan Result
When this parameter is enabled, the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen.
Scan Indicator
When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated.
Scan Result Time (sec)
The value assigned to the
Scan Result Time
parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of
0 (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box appears where you can enter a value.
Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired, point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger.
Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep
These parameters determine whether or not Omnii emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either
on
to enable the beeper or
off
to disable it.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
153
Chapter 5: Configuration
Translations Tab
Good Scan Vibrates and Bad Scan Vibrates
These parameters determine whether or not Omnii creates a vibration when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either
on
to enable the beeper or
off
to disable it. You can set the
Number
and
Duration
of vibrations, as well as the
Pause
between vibrations. The screen above shows the default settings.
Soft Scan Timeout
This parameter is used by the SDK “Scan” function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the
SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft-scan timeout from
1
to
10 sec
(default is
3 sec
).
Scan Log File
If this parameter is enabled, the input bar code and the modified/translated output bar code are logged in the file
\Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt
. Keep in mind that if
Scan Log File
is enabled, there is a slight performance reduction when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage.
5.12.3 Translations Tab
The
Translations
menu allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order. Only one case will be applied to a bar code and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successful—if a rule within a case fails, the entire case fails.
154
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Translations Tab
• In the
Translation
menu, tap on the
Case #
to create rules.
• Tap on the
No rule
drop-down menu to display the rules.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
155
Chapter 5: Configuration
Translations Tab
When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.
5.12.3.1 Case Rules
The case rules are defined as follows:
•
No rule
—ignored.
•
Search and replace
—replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule cannot fail.)
•
Match at index
—matches the match string at a specified index.
•
Match and replace at index
—matches the match string at a specified index and replaces/changes it.
•
Replace at index
—replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.
•
Add barcode prefix/suffix
—adds a global prefix or suffix.
156
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Ports Tab
•
Verify barcode size
—verifies the bar code size. This rule should generally be assigned first, before creating subsequent rules.
Note: Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the bar code size is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied.
Translation information about the status of each case/rule is displayed in the scan log file
(see “Scan Log File” on page 154) when enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are
trying to determine why a rule is failing.
5.12.4 Ports Tab
Figure 5.5 Console and Port Replicator Port Settings
While you cannot configure the scanner, you can configure communications with a serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab.
Use these settings to ensure that the communication ports on Omnii match the settings of the serial devices to which they are connected. If the settings do not match exactly, the devices may not function. Note that some devices can auto-detect serial port settings (such as baud rate), and in this case Omnii will dictate the settings. Baud rates often have a direct impact on performance—they should be set as high as possible while still ensuring reliable communication.
5.12.4.1 Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6)
Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) are standard RS-232 DE-9 DTE ports on the Omnii port replicator module, available on certain cradle types.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
157
Chapter 5: Configuration
Ports Tab
Enabled
This parameter must be set to ON in order for Omnii to recognize the device connected to the Port Replicator 9-pin (COM5).
Baud
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can choose an appropriate rate of data transfer.
Figure 5.6 Port Baud Rates
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte.
Most devices use 8-bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits.
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port replicator port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose the appropriate parity.
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits—1, 1.5 or 2—used for asynchronous communication.
158
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Total Recall
Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence
If a SICK scanner connected to an Omnii port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner
on
and another to trigger the scanner
off
, the
Trigger On Sequence
and
Trigger
Off Sequence
parameters allow you to define these serial streams.
Double-tapping on
Trigger On Sequence
or
Trigger Off Sequence
displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements.
These parameters work in conjunction with
Manage Triggers
sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned. For example, suppose you launch
Manage Triggers
and choose
Decoded Scanner
as the ‘module to trigger’. Next, you assign a ‘trigger key’—for this example, . (period). To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the
on
and
off
function of the ‘trigger key’, enter a hex value in the
Trigger On Sequence
and the
Trigger Off Sequence
fields. When you press the trigger key, the
Trigger On Sequence
is sent and when you release the trigger key, the
Trigger Off Sequence
is sent, turning the trigger key
on
and
off
.
5.13
Total Recall
Total Recall
is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot, and clone settings to other devices. This utility is based on a backup and restore concept.
• In the
Control Panel
, choose the
Total Recall
icon.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
159
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating a Backup Profile
5.13.1 Creating a Backup Profile
In the start up screen, you can choose from four options:
Create Profile
,
Restore Profile
,
View Profile
and
Delete Profile
.
• Tap on the
Create Profile
button to begin the process.
Profile Information
160
This dialog box displays the default profile name, the type of restore –
AutoRestore
or
ManualRestore
, and the possible storage destination for the profile file.
• To change the
Profile Name
(optional), tap on the
[...]
button to the right of the
Profile
Location
field.
• In the
Name
field, type a new name. (You may need to move the onscreen keyboard down to make the
Name
field visible.)
• Tap on
OK
to save the new profile name.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating a Backup Profile
• Next, choose the profile
Type
you want to create:
-
ManualRestore
– creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator.
-
AutoRestore
– creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold reset or a clean reset.
• Finally, if you want to choose another location for your backup file (optional), tap on the
[...]
button to the right of the
Profile Location
field.
Important: Any profile not stored in persistent memory (flash disk, external usb drive) will be erased during a clean boot, therefore you should store profiles on a persistent drive.
When performing an autorestore, the program only searches for profiles located in the root folder of persistent drives. If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored.
When there are multiple autorestore profiles found, only the latest is restored.
• Navigate to the new location, and tap on
OK
to save it.
• Tap on the (Next) button.
Defining the Type of Backup
Default Backup
Default Backup
is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries, and the Registry are saved. Choose
Advanced Backup
if you want to tailor your backup.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
161
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating a Backup Profile
Advanced Backup
Choosing
Advanced Backup
allows you to define what you would like to include in your backup profile.
• Tap in the checkbox next to the option(s) listed here to tailor what you want included in the backup.
Creating a Profile
Once you’ve defined the type of profile you want to create:
• Tap on the
Create Profile
button.
The options you chose to back up appear in your window as the backup progresses. When the backup is complete, the last item in the list indicates the location and name of the backup profile.
162
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Restoring a Profile
5.13.2 Restoring a Profile
To manually restore a profile:
• In the
Total Recall
home screen, tap on
Restore Profile
.
• Tap on the
[...]
button to the right of the
Profile
field and locate your backup file.
• Tap on
OK
.
• In the
Profile
restore screen, click on the (Next) button.
• Click on
Restore Profile
to restore the files to your Omnii.
5.13.3 Viewing a Profile
To view a profile:
• In the
Total Recall
home screen, tap on
View Profile
.
• Tap on the
[...]
button to the right of the
Profile
field, and locate your backup file.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
163
Chapter 5: Configuration
Deleting a Profile
• Tap on
OK
.
• Tap on
View Details
to review your backup files.
5.13.4 Deleting a Profile
• In the
Total Recall
home screen, tap on
Delete Profile
.
• In the next screen, locate your backup file, and tap on
OK
.
A warning pop-up screen appears asking if you’re certain that you want to delete this file.
• Tap on
Yes
to delete the file.
164
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
TweakIT Settings
5.14
TweakIT Settings
This utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust
Advanced
system settings (interface, network, servers, driver, and radio),
User
settings (Internet Explorer settings, font size, and docking port message), and provides a
Registry Editor
.
5.14.1 Advanced
5.14.1.1 Advanced CE Services Settings
FTP Server
This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folder—that is, data are always loaded from the
FTP Server
to the
Temp
folder and from the
Temp
folder to the
FTP Server
.
If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
165
Chapter 5: Configuration
Advanced
5.14.1.2 Advanced Interface and Network Settings
Enable IPv6
This option allows you to enabled Internet Protocol specification, version 6, that has been published to enable 128-bit IP addresses (replacing version 4).
Modem Logging
When this option is enabled, Omnii logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands are stored in: \MdmLog.txt.
5.14.1.3 Advanced Services Settings
166
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
User
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server
The
SNTP Server Name
typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize Omnii time with the server time. A warm reset must be performed once the server name as been entered.
5.14.2 User
5.14.2.1 User Display Settings
User Font Size
This option allows you to adjust the size of the font used in the Omnii display:
Large
,
Normal
, or
Small
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
167
Chapter 5: Configuration
Registry Editor
5.14.3 Registry Editor
This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values.
Warning: Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to Omnii.
168
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
P
ERIPHERAL
D
EVICES
& A
CCESSORIES
6
6.1 Documents Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
6.2 Keyboard and Keypad Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
6.3 Pistol Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
6.4 Carrying and Protective Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
6.4.1 Attaching the Hand Strap - Model No. ST6025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
6.4.2 Attaching the Shoulder Strap - Model No. ST6030 . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
6.4.3 Protective Carrying Case - Model No. ST6090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
6.4.4 Hard Shell Holster - Model No. ST6055. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
6.5 Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
6.5.1 Important Charger Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
6.5.2 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
6.5.3 Installation—Chargers and Docking Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
6.5.4 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
6.5.5 Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
6.6 Power Adaptor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
6.6.1 Snap Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
6.6.2 AC Wall Adaptor - Model No. ST1050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
6.6.3 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
6.7 Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
6.7.1 Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
6.7.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
6.7.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
6.7.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
6.7.3.2 Charging the Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
6.7.4 Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6.7.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6.7.5.1 Docking station does not seem to power on. . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6.7.5.2 Omnii charge indicator LED stays off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6.7.5.3 Omnii charge indicator LED is red.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6.7.5.4 Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed. . . . . . . . . .185
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
169
6.7.5.5 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed. . 185
6.8 Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model No. ST3006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
6.8.1 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.8.2 Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.8.3 Charge Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.8.4 Charging Batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
6.8.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
6.8.5.1 Improper Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
6.8.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
6.8.5.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed . . . . . . . . . 188
6.9 Scanners and Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.9.1 Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.9.2 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.9.3 Scanner Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.9.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6.9.5 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . 190
6.9.6 Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6.10 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
170
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Documents Available
6.1
Documents Available
Table 6.1 Document Part Numbers
Document
Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
ST4002 and ST4003 Desktop Docking Stations Quick Start Guide
ST3006 Omnii 6-Slot Battery Charger Quick Start Guide
Part Number
8100190
8000203
8000204
Omnii Hand-Held Computer Keyboard and Keypad Installation Instructions 8000208
Imager Installation Instructions for Omnii 8000209
Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide
TekTerm Software User Manual
Mobile Devices SDK Developers' Guide
8000191
8000073
8100016
6.2
Keyboard and Keypad Kits
Note: Check your order sheet for an up-to-date list of models.
Table 6.2 Keyboard and Keypad Model Numbers
Keyboard and Keypad Kits
Keyboard Bezel Removal Tool
Kbd Long, 59 Key, Alpha ABC, Numeric Telephony, 6 Fn
Kbd Long, 36 Key, Numeric Telephony, 12 Fn
Kbd Long, 36 Key, Alpha Modified, Numeric Calculator, 12 Fn
Model Number
ST5999
Keyboard Keypad
ST5000
ST5001
ST5002
ST5100
ST5101
ST5102
6.3
Pistol Grips
There are a number of pistol grips available to you depending on the type of scanner/imager
installed in your hand-held. Refer to Table 6.3 for a list of pistol grip model numbers and the
types of scanners/imagers with which they are compatible.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
171
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Pistol Grips
Table 6.3 Pistol Grip Model Numbers
Pistol Grip Description
Standard Pod
Integrated
Accessory Auto Range
Model Number
ST6000
ST6100
ST6400
Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly.
The pistol grip is attached to the back of Omnii using the four threaded inserts in the upper
part of the Omnii casing (see Figure 6.1). Four M3x6 Phillips head screws are provided.
• Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pistol grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the hand-held.
• Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws to a torque of 3 lbs-in (3kgf-cm) to secure the pistol grip in place.
Figure 6.1 Attaching the Pistol Grip
172
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Carrying and Protective Accessories
6.4
Carrying and Protective Accessories
Note: Omnii Hand-Held Computer is a body worn device, and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Psion Teklogix approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
There are a variety of carrying and protective accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably with Omnii.
Attaching Carrying Accessories
If your Omnii is not fitted with a hand strap, you can install it using the carrying accessory kit supplied. You’ll need:
• A Phillips head screwdriver.
Important: Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.
Table 6.4 Accessories Model Numbers
Accessory
Wrist Strap
Hand Strap
Shoulder Strap
Soft Shell Holster
Hard Shell Holster
Forklift Holster
Carrying Case
Pouch
Screen Protector
Model Number
ST6040
ST6025
ST6030
ST6050
ST6055
ST6051
ST6090
ST6091
ST6112
6.4.1
Attaching the Hand Strap - Model No. ST6025
• Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the hand-held near
the top of the unit (see Figure 6.2), using the two Phillips head screws provided with
this accessory.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
173
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Attaching the Shoulder Strap - Model No. ST6030
• Stretch the handstrap toward the base of the hand-held, and hook the clip at the bottom of the handstrap into the slot near the base of the battery pack.
Figure 6.2 Attaching the Hand Strap
Clip
Hand Strap Slot
6.4.2
Attaching the Shoulder Strap - Model No. ST6030
• Attach the shoulder strap clip to the slot at the base of the hand-held (Figure 6.3).
Figure 6.3 Attaching the Shoulder Strap
174
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Protective Carrying Case - Model No. ST6090
6.4.3
Protective Carrying Case - Model No. ST6090
A carrying case is available for Omnii to shield the unit from damage. It is equipped with a soft plastic window to protect the unit display and keyboard. A variety of cases are available, depending on the type of end-cap attached to your unit.
6.4.4
Hard Shell Holster - Model No. ST6055
A hard shell holster can be used to hang Omnii with a pistol grip from your waist.
• Feed your belt through the top panel of the holster, and adjust the belt as needed.
• If using the leg tie-down strap, wrap it around your leg and snap the buckle closed.
Adjust the tightness of the strap for security and comfort.
• Place Omnii into the holster with the grip extending back through the custom opening.
Figure 6.4 Hard Shell Holster
6.5
Chargers and Docking Stations: General Information
6.5.1
Important Charger Safety Instructions
Important: Before charging a battery with a desktop docking station, it is critical that you review the safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191).
6.5.2
Charging the Battery
Omnii Hand-Held Computer operates with a lithium-ion battery pack, Model No. ST3000.
Preparing the unit for operation requires that the battery pack be charged and installed in the hand-held.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
175
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Installation—Chargers and Docking Stations
Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithiumion battery packs must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations. Currently the following are available:
• The Snap Module is a mobile adaptor for Omnii. Three models are available—see
• The AC Wall Adaptor operates as an AC power source and also charges the battery
installed in the unit—see “AC Wall Adaptor - Model No. ST1050” on page 179.
• The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor powers Omnii and recharges the battery using power
drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet—see “Vehicle Power Outlet
Adaptor - Model ST3113” on page 179.
• The Desktop Docking Stations operate as both chargers and docking stations. Operating as a charger, both the battery installed in Omnii and a spare battery can be charged. Pri-
ority is given to charging the hand-held's battery. See “Desktop Docking Stations -
Models ST4002 and ST4003” on page 180.
Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery. The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over-charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity.
Table 6.5 Omnii Internal Battery Charging Times
% Charge Completed
100%
75%
4 hrs.
During Sleep Mode
2.5 hrs.
8 hrs.
6 hrs.
While Operating
Important: To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).
6.5.3
Installation—Chargers and Docking Stations
When installing a charger or docking station, consider the following guidelines.
• Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants.
• Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0°C to 40°C
(32°F to 104°F). It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature—between 18°C and 25°C (64°F to 77°F) for maximum performance.
176
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Operator Controls
After unpacking your unit:
• Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.
• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
6.5.4
Operator Controls
Omnii docking stations and chargers have no operator controls.
6.5.5
Power Consumption Considerations
Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or docking stations is adequate for the load, especially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit.
6.6
Power Adaptor Options
The following adaptors can be ordered for your Omnii:
Adaptor Description
AC Wall Adaptor
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor
Snap Module – Power/Charger Only
Snap Module – USB Host/Client plus Power/Charger
Snap Module – USB DE9M powered serial plus Charger
Model Number
ST1050
ST3113
ST3101
ST4001
ST4005
6.6.1
Snap Modules
The Snap Module is a mobile power adaptor for Omnii. The Snap Module is compatible with the AC Wall Adaptor and the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor.
Three types of Snap Modules are available:
• Model No. ST3101 (Charger only variant): powers and charges the hand-held.
• Model No. ST4001 (USB Host/Client variant): powers and charges the hand-held. It provides communications via USB 1.1/2.0 Host and USB 2.0 Client connectors and provides a DC IN port. When attached to Omnii, it allows ActiveSync connectivity with your PC, connection to an AC wall adaptor (Model No. ST1050) or a Vehicle Power
Outlet Adaptor (Model No. ST3113), and the use of a micro-USB to USB ‘A’ cable
(Model No. PX3058).
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
177
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Snap Modules
• Model No. ST4005 (USB DE9M variant): through a powered DE9M serial connector it powers and charges the hand-held, and provides communications to tethered devices.
The DE9M connector is capable of speeds up to 115,200 kbp.
Figure 6.5 Snap Module Models and Installation
ST3101 (Charger)
Side Rail
Locking Clip
ST4001 (USB Host/Client)
Hand Strap Slot
DC IN Port
ST4005 (USB DE9M)
To attach the adaptor to Omnii:
• Make sure that the adaptor connector and Omnii docking connector are free of dust or any other debris before connecting them.
• A slot in the side rail on each side of the hand-held accommodates the locking clips of the adaptor. To attach the adaptor, align it with the base of the hand-held and gently slide
up until the locking clips snap into place (Refer to Figure 6.5).
• To remove the adaptor, press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the
Omnii side rails and slide the adaptor off.
Note: If you are using a hand or shoulder strap, there is no need to remove it before installing the Snap Module, since the Omnii hand strap slot will still be accessible.
178
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
AC Wall Adaptor - Model No. ST1050
6.6.2
AC Wall Adaptor - Model No. ST1050
The AC wall adaptor available for your docking station or Snap Module allows you to operate your hand-held using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.
Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following regions are shipped with the AC wall adaptor: United Kingdom, Australia, Europe and North America.
Figure 6.6 AC Wall Adaptor Plugs
Adaptor Plugs
Universal AC Power Supply
DC Power Plug
• Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor.
• Insert the DC plug into the docking station or Snap Module jack.
• Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.
6.6.3
Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor - Model ST3113
The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor allows you to power your hand-held and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicle’s automotive power outlet when used in conjunction with a Snap Module.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
179
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003
Figure 6.7 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor
DC Power Plug
Adaptor Plug
•
• Insert the DC power plug on the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor into the DC IN port on the USB adaptor.
• Insert the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle.
Note: Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.
6.7
Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003
Omnii can be inserted into two desktop docking stations which are designed to charge the battery installed in the hand-held along with a spare battery pack: Models ST4002 and ST4003.
Important: These docking stations can only be used to charge Psion Teklogix approved lithium-ion batteries.
The ST4002 and ST4003 desktop docking stations feature:
• Fast charging of the internal battery.
• Fast charging of the spare battery pack.
• A Host USB port to connect peripherals such as a printer, keyboard, etc.
• A Client USB port to connect the docking station to a PC.
Note: The ST4002 desktop dock can be upgraded to include the DE9M and RJ45 interfaces by using the ST4100 Xmod (Expansion Module).
180
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Desktop Docking Stations - Models ST4002 and ST4003
The ST4003 desktop docking station additionally provides:
• A DE9M serial port (unpowered) and an RJ45 10Base-T Ethernet interface. Both these interfaces are compatible with the USB to Ethernet/serial drivers included in Omnii (see
Figure 6.8 Desktop Docking Station - Models ST4002 and ST4003
Omnii Charge Well
Release Button
Spare Battery
LED
(Indicates charge status of a spare battery inserted in the rear charge well of the docking station.)
Note: The desktop docking station is shipped with its own user manual (ST4002 and
ST4003 Desktop Docking Stations Quick Start Guide, PN 8000203). It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.
The desktop docking station storage temperature is -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to 140°F). Operating temperature and humidity are: 5 - 95% non-condensing and 0°C to 40°C (32°F to
104°F).
The desktop docking station uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensuring the shortest possible charge time. The charger supports proprietary Psion
battery life. See “Charging the Spare Battery” on page 183 for spare battery charge
information.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
181
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii
Figure 6.9 Back of ST4003 Desktop Docking Station
Locking Arm
Connector Pins
Spare Battery
Charge Well
DC IN Port
Host USB Port
RJ45 Ethernet Port
Client USB Port
DE9M Serial Port
6.7.1
Charging a Battery Installed in Omnii
• Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN port on the desktop docking station. Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet.
• Slide the hand-held into the docking station, making certain that the hand-held is securely seated on the docking station connector pins and engages the locking arms of the docking station. When the Omnii is switched on, a message is displayed briefly on the screen indicating that the unit is properly installed in the station and the docking station icon is displayed in the taskbar.
The LED on Omnii lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging will begin. It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use—the battery will not be overcharged.
182
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Indicators
6.7.2
Indicators
The front-mounted LED on the desktop docking station indicates the spare battery charge status. The LED on Omnii is active even when the hand-held is inserted in a docking station
(and in suspend mode) so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily.
Table 6.6 Docking Station Battery Charge LED Behaviour
Charge LED Behaviour
OFF
Solid Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Yellow
Solid Red
Function
No battery detected.
Battery charging complete.
Charge in progress.
Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.
Unable to read battery or non Psion Teklogix battery.
6.7.3
Operation
6.7.3.1 Charging the Omnii Battery
The desktop docking station supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger.
When installed in the dock, the Omnii battery charge LED will illuminate to indicate the unit has external power and can charge the internal battery. Omnii charge indication follows
the same convention as the charger's spare battery indicator (Figure 6.8).
Note: Battery charging continues whether Omnii is switched on or off.
6.7.3.2 Charging the Spare Battery
Important: Do not store spare batteries in a charger for more than 72 hours. Doing so may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity.
• Install the battery in the battery charge well (rear slot of the desktop docking station).
Place the battery contacts down to mate with the connector, and pivot the battery into place in the battery charge well.
• The desktop docking station spare battery LED lights up immediately. During charge the LED will be flashing green.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
183
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station
• When the battery has finished charging, the LED turns solid green.
• The charge stops when the battery is fully charged and the LED remains green.
A full charge will take 3 to 4 hours for a 5000 mAh battery.
6.7.4
Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station
Important: Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.
• Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the desktop docking station. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
• To clean ink marks from the label, use isopropyl alcohol.
6.7.5
Troubleshooting
The indicators, applications, and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop docking station as a dock (as opposed to a charger) are installed on Omnii—no applications are present on the docking station itself.
6.7.5.1 Docking station does not seem to power on.
• When first connected to the DC power supply, the charger LED should flash a sequence of red, yellow, and green.
• If not, the charger is defective and requires service.
6.7.5.2 Omnii charge indicator LED stays off.
When Omnii is docked into a powered desktop docking station and its charge indicator LED stays off, there could be a problem with the hand-held or with the docking station. Use a hand-held with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem.
6.7.5.3 Omnii charge indicator LED is red.
If the Omnii charge indicator is red when the hand-held is docked:
• Remove Omnii and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable.
• Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
• If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault, the hand-held requires service.
184
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model No. ST3006
6.7.5.4 Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed.
• Try inserting a battery that is known to be working with another charger.
• If the charge slot LED continues to show red with the known working battery, the charger is defective and requires service.
•
Your Psion Teklogix battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for safety and capacity performance in accordance with IEEE 1725. If the battery or charger are not Psion Teklogix approved products, or the safety mechanism is faulty, the spare charge slot LED or the Omnii LED will display red.
6.7.5.5 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed.
• Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken?).
• Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot.
• Try inserting a battery that you know to be working into the charger slot.
• Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor, and check that the spare battery LED indicator flashes at power-up.
• If the charge slot fails to charge the known working battery, it is defective and requires service.
6.8
Battery Charger (6-Slot) - Model No. ST3006
The ST3006 is designed to charge up to six Omnii lithium-ion batteries at one time.
Important: Keep in mind when ordering a charger, you must also order an IEC-320 C13 power cord separately.
Figure 6.10 ST3006 Battery Charger
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
185
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Installation
6.8.1
Installation
The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit (MT2031) or it can be operated on a flat surface. Install the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants. The ambient temperature must be in the range 5°C to 39°C (41°F to 102°F). The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range. For maximum performance, it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature—a temperature range between 18°C to 25°C (64°F to 77°F).
The charger can consume up to 6 A at 120 VAC, 3A at 240 VAC. Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading (especially if several chargers are being powered from the same circuit). After unpacking the unit:
• Visually check the charger for damage.
• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
Important: Use IEC-320 C13 power cords approved by Psion Teklogix, with the ground pin connected to a proper earth-grounded receptacle. Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding.
All charge indicators flash momentarily at powerup to indicate that the charger is ready for operation.
If you choose to wall mount the charger, detailed installation instructions are included in the
Omnii 6-Slot Battery Charger ST3006 Quick Start Guide (PN 8000204)
included with the charger kit. Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity.
6.8.2
Operator Controls
The gang charger does not have operator controls or a power switch. There is no dedicated indicator light to show that the charger is powered, but the charge slot LEDs will light.
6.8.3
Charge Indicators
Each battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the battery. When the Omnii batteries are inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the
LEDs associated with the charge wells in use indicate the status of the charge.
186
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Charging Batteries
Table 6.7 Charge Status Indicator LEDs
Charge LED Behaviour
OFF
Solid Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Yellow
Solid Red
Function
No battery detected.
Battery charging complete. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.
Charge in progress. Each LED represents 25% battery capacity.
Battery is not charging due to out-of-temperature conditions.
Unable to read battery or non Psion Teklogix battery.
6.8.4
Charging Batteries
• Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger. Slide the battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place.
The 4-LED bar for the battery bay shows 25% charger per LED. A flashing green LED shows charging is under way. The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately. If the battery temperature is outside 5°C to 39°C (41°F to 102°F), the
LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable. A fully discharged battery will normally take from 3 to 4 hours to charge. At full capacity, it turns solid green.
When the battery is fully charged, the charger stops applying power; the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot.
6.8.5
Troubleshooting
6.8.5.1 Improper Battery Storage
Storing batteries in the gang charger for extended periods (more than a week or two) is not recommended. Lithium-ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for
long periods of time. See the battery handling recommendations in “The Battery” on page 14.
6.8.5.2 Power LED Does Not Light Up
• Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger.
• Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.
• Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.
• Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
187
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Scanners and Imagers
6.8.5.3 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed
• Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot.
• Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the slot.
• Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).
• Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot.
• Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the slot indicator flashes at powerup.
6.9
Scanners and Imagers
Important: It is critical that you review the “Laser Warnings” in the Omnii Hand-Held
Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191) before using any of the scanners described in this chapter.
Note: To enable a newly-installed imager or scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the [ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
Omnii supports a wide range of scanner options to address a variety of user application requirements. Refer to the following sections for detailed information:
•
“Teklogix Scanners” on page 149
•
“Scanning Techniques” on page 189 outlines the mechanics of a successful scan.
•
“Scanner Status LED” on page 189 details how to interpret whether or not a bar code
has been successfully scanned.
•
Bar Code Parameters: Appendix C: “Bar Code Settings”.
•
Imager Settings: Appendix D: “Teklogix Imagers Applet”.
•
“Troubleshooting” on page 190 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail.
Scanner types include:
• Long Range: reads large 1D bar codes (55 mil) at long distances (up to 3m).
• Standard Range/High Performance: reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D bar codes
(5 - 55mil) at medium distances (up to 1m).
• Extended Range: reads regular 1D bar codes (5 - 55mil) at short to medium distances
(1m), as well as large 1D bar codes (e.g. 55 mil) at long distances.
188
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Basic Scanner Operations
• Fuzzy Logic: reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D bar codes (5 - 55mil) at medium distances (up to 1m).
• PDF Raster Laser: reads 2D PDF bar codes or damaged or low contrast regular 1D bar codes (5 - 55mil) at medium distances (up to 1m).
• 1D Imager: reads regular 1D and PDF417 bar codes at short to medium distances.
6.9.1
Basic Scanner Operations
• Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.
6.9.2
Scanning Techniques
• Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code.
• Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. In this position, light can reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode.
• Scan the entire bar code. If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner, make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end of the symbol.
• If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped framing mark is centered within the bar code you want to scan.
• When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the bar code.
Movement blurs the image.
• Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes.
• Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together.
6.9.3
Scanner Status LED
The scanner LED (the far right LED) indicates whether or not your scan is successful. The
LED behaves as follows:
• Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour.
• Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended.
• Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red.
A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the onscreen message states: SCANNING. If you want to turn off the onscreen message, disable
“Scan Indication” in the
Options
tab in the
Control Panel>Scanner Settings
menu.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
189
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Troubleshooting
When the scan is successful, the bar code data is displayed on the screen until the scan button (or pistol trigger) is released, but only if “Scan Result” is turned on in the
Options
tab in the
Control Panel>Scanner Settings
menu.
6.9.4
Troubleshooting
If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:
• Is the unit on?
• Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand-held you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code.
• Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code.
• Check that the bar code is within the proper range.
• Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the hand-held.
• Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code?
• Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging.
6.9.5
Operating One Dimensional (1D) Internal Laser Scanners
• Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
Important: If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after which normal scanning
begins. Refer to “Dot Time (msec)” on page C-7 for details.
Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range and high visibility internal scanners.
• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.
6.9.6
Operating Internal Two Dimensional (2D) Imagers
An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single bar code or multiple bar codes (at one time).
It can find a bar code regardless of its orientation—that is, even a bar code printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand-held will be decoded successfully.
190
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Bluetooth Peripherals
Note: When scanning
multiple
bar codes, ensure that all of the desired bar codes are within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all bar codes are within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully decoded bar codes are passed to the application program. The application program then issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing bar codes.
When scanning a
single
bar code, ensure that only the desired bar code is within the field of view of the scanner.
Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of bar codes being scanned. Although the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode the bar codes, especially if the bar code is far from the hand-held.
Important: Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illumination is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated bar codes, just as glare is an issue for photographers. When pointing at a shiny surface, either shift the bar code to the side or top, or angle the bar code so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner.
Most imagers take several ‘snap shots’ of the bar code in order to decode it.
It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance.
• Turn the hand-held computer on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
• Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan result is obtained.
• When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is displayed. Centre the framing marker in the field—either in the centre of the bar code you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple bar codes are to be scanned.
The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the bar code(s) is taken.
6.10
Bluetooth
Peripherals
It is possible to communicate with a variety of
Bluetooth
peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and so on. The range of the
Bluetooth
radio in Omnii is limited to approximately 10 meters (32 ft.).
Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for:
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
191
Chapter 6: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
Bluetooth Peripherals
• GSM/GPRS universal handset
•
Bluetooth
printer
•
Bluetooth
headset
Keep in mind that
Bluetooth
and IEEE 802.11g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band. Although Omnii includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the hand-held at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously—this has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11 network, Psion Teklogix recommends using
Bluetooth
peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as printers and scanners).
Bluetooth
peripherals are configured by choosing the
Bluetooth
icon in the
Control Panel
.
Refer to “Bluetooth® Setup” on page 125 for information about setting up your
Bluetooth
devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your
Bluetooth
device to determine the method used to associate with the Omnii host.
192
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
S
PECIFICATIONS
7
7.1 The Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer (Model No. 7545XV) . . . . . . . . . . . .195
7.1.1 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
7.1.2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
7.1.3 Approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
7.2 Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
7.3 Wireless Radios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
7.4 Internal Scanners and Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
7.4.1 SE955 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
7.4.1.1 SE955 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
7.4.2 SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
7.4.3 SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
7.4.3.1 SE1224HP Decode Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
7.4.4 SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
7.4.4.1 SE1524ER Decode Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
7.4.5 EV15 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
7.4.5.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
7.4.6 5080 Imager/Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
7.4.6.1 5080 Working Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
7.5 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
7.6 Camera (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
193
Chapter 7: Specifications
The Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer (Model No. 7545XV)
7.1
The Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer (Model No. 7545XV)
Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.
7.1.1
Hardware
Physical Dimensions
• 100 mm width x 42 mm depth x 230 mm length (3.9 in x 1.6 in x 9 in).
• Keypad area: 75 mm width x 32 mm depth (2.9 in x 1.3 in).
Weight
• With battery pack, EV15 imager, and extreme duty display 760 g (26.8 oz.)
User Interface
Colour Touch Display: 9.4 cm (3.7 in.) diagonal.
VGA/QVGA, 480 x 640 resolution.
High visibility version: superior sunlight visibility.
Extreme Duty version: withstands 1.2 joules impact.
Keyboards:
Indicators And Controls:
Side Buttons:
Audio:
Backlit, high durability hard-capped keys.
Large selection of both alpha and numeric formats.
For a list of currently available keyboard configurations, consult your order sheet, or go to “Keyboard and Keypad Kits” on page 169.
Four multi-colour LEDs indicate the status of the battery, application, radio, and scanner.
Volume, Scan, Enter, Vertical Scroll.
High volume beeper: 95 dBA
Integrated Microphone/Speaker.
Optional PTT Speaker.
Walkie-talkie style Push-to-Talk: VoIP over Wi-Fi
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
195
Chapter 7: Specifications
Hardware
Vibration: You can set Omnii to vibrate as a result of a successful or unsuccessful bar code scan.
Power Management
•
Battery Pack
: lithium-ion 5000 mAh capacity with 8-hour life under normal operating
conditions (for battery specifications, see “Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh
• Advanced Smart Battery with gas gauge.
• 3 power source options: Runs off battery, AC power, or automotive power supplies.
• Backup power: >5 minutes.
Communication
Expansion Ports: MicroSD slot for Flash expansion.
Multiple Internal Multi-Function Expansion Interfaces with:
- 3v3 TTL serial
- USB host
- GPIO
Environmental
Standard Operating Temperature: -20°C to +50°C (-4°F to 122°F)
Storage Temperature: -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to 140°F)
Long exposure to temperatures below -40°C (-40°F) may damage the screen and main battery. Prolonged exposure to temperatures above +60°C (+140°F) will damage the main battery and temperatures above
+70°C (+158°F) may damage the unit.
Rain And Dust Resistance:
Humidity:
Drop Durability:
IEC 60529, classification IP65.
5% - 95% RH non-condensing
1.7 m (5.6 ft.), 26 drops to polished concrete (while powered on and with accessories); multiple 2.0 m
(6.5 ft.) drops to polished concrete.
196
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
Software
ESD: +/- 8 kV contact, +/- 15 kV air discharge.
7.1.2
Software
Processor and Memory
• Texas Instruments
®
OMAP3
®
Processor 600 MHz
• RAM: 512 MB SDRAM standard.
• Flash ROM: 512 MB.
Operating System
• Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6.0
Bundled Applications
• Internet Explorer 6
• Wordpad
• ActiveSync
7.1.3
Approvals
Safety:
EMC:
Laser:
Bluetooth
:
RF:
RoHS compliant:
IEC 60950-1
FCC Part 15 Class B
EN 55022
EN 55024
EN 301 489
IEC 60825-1 Ed. 2.0, Class 1, Class 2
FDA 21 CFR 1040.10
1040.11 Class I, Class II
2.0
Bluetooth
and 802.11b/g: EN300 328, Part 15.247
EU Directive 2002/95/EC
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
197
Chapter 7: Specifications
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000)
7.2
Lithium-ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh (ST3000)
For safety instructions, please see “Lithium-ion Battery Safety Precautions” in the
Omnii
Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000191)
.
Parameter
Model Number
Chemistry
Capacity
Voltage
Cell Configuration
Max. Charge Voltage
Recommended Charge
Termination Timeout
Charge Temperature
Discharge Temperature
Storage Temperature
Cycle Life
Specification
ST3000 lithium-ion (Li-Ion)
5000 mAh nominal at 1000 mA discharge 20°C to 3.0 V (min)
3.7 V nominal (3.0 V min. to 4.2 V max.)
2 P1S (2 parallel connected cells)
4.2 V +/- 1%
5.0 hr - charging must stop.
0°C to +40°C (32°F to +104°F)
-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122°F)
-20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122 ºF). Storage at elevated temperatures not recommended.
25°C (77 ºF)—recommended storage temperature.
300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 80% of nominal capacity based on 1C charge / 1C discharge rates
(to 3.0 V) @ 25°C (77 ºF).
198
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
Wireless Radios
7.3
Wireless Radios
802.11b/g Radio
Parameter
Form Factor
Antenna Port
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
Channels
RX Sensitivity
Data Rates
EVM
Bluetooth
Coexistence
Bluetooth
Radio
Specification
Embedded surface mount module, 8.2 x 8.4 mm
U.FL jack
802.11b/g: 50 mW typical (+17 dBm)
2.400 - 2.4835 GHz
1-11 FCC, 1-13 ETSI
-86 dBm typ @ 11 Mbps
-82 dBm @ 6 Mbps, -69 dBm @ 54 Mbps
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
802.11b: -28 dB typ (16%)
802.11g: -29 dB typ (13%)
Collaborative with
Bluetooth
radio.
Parameter
Form Factor
Bluetooth
Version
Antenna Type
Antenna Gain
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
Specification
Embedded (920 kbps serial interface)
Ver 2.0+EDR compliant - Adaptive Frequency Hopping (AFH) for better co-existence with 802.11 radio and Enhanced Data Rate (EDR)
(up to 3 Mbps).
Ceramic chip PIFA
1 dBi peak
-3 dBm (0.5mW) minimum, +4 dBm (2.5 mW) max
2.400–2.4835 GHz
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
199
Chapter 7: Specifications
Internal Scanners and Imagers
Parameter
RX Sensitivity
(BER<0.1%)
Data Rate
-80 dBm max
Specification
V1.2 = 732.2 kbps and 57.6 kbps asymmetric, 433.9 kbps symmetric
V2.0 = 2 & 3 Mbps
Collaborative with 802.11 radio and adaptive frequency hopping. 802.11 Coexistence
7.4
Internal Scanners and Imagers
This section lists specifications for the following internal scanners:
•
•
SE1223LR - Long Range (decoded) Scanner (page 202)
•
SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner (page 203).
•
SE1524ER - Extended Range Scanner (page 205).
•
EV15 1D Standard Range Imager (page 207).
•
5080 Imager/Decoder (page 208).
200
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
SE955 Scanner
7.4.1
SE955 Scanner
Parameter
Configuration
Scan Rate
Scan Angle
Voltage
Ambient Light:
Laser Safety
Electrical Safety
EMI/RFI
Environmental
7.4.1.1 SE955 Decode Zones
SE955
Decoded
104 (± 12) scans/sec (bidirectional)
47º± 3º default / 35º ± 3º reduced
3.0-3.6 V± 10%;
5 V± 10%
10,000 ft. candles
IEC 60825
UL 60950, EN/IEC 60950
FCC Part 15 Class B, EN 55024/CISPR 22, AS 3548,
VCCI
RoHS Compliant
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
201
Chapter 7: Specifications
SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner
7.4.2
SE1223LR - Long Range (Decoded) Scanner
Parameter
Light Source
Scan Rate
Scan Angle
Scan Patterns
Minimum Print Contrast
Symbologies Supported
Programmable Parameters
Ambient Light
Power
Laser Classification
Electrical Safety
Environmental
SE1223LR
Visible Laser Diode 650 nm
35 (± 5) scans/sec (bi-directional)
23º ± 2º
Linear
Minimum 40% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at
650 nm.
UPC/EAN, Code 128, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5,
Codabar, MSI, UCC/EAN 128, TriOptic Code 39.
Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bidirectional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting, Serial Parameters, Beeper Tone.
Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux).
Sunlight: 8,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux).
Input Voltage: 5.0 VDC ± 10%
Input Current: 115 mA typical
Standby Current: 70
µA max.
Intended for use in CDRH Class II and IEC Class 2 devices
UL, VDE, and CUL recognized component laser
RoHS-compliant
202
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner
7.4.3
SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner
Parameter
Type
Light Source
Scan Rate
Scan Angle/Field of View
Scan Patterns
Minimum Print Contrast
Symbologies
Programmable Parameters
Ambient Light
Laser Output Power (peak)
SE1224HP
Laser Class 2
Visible Laser Diode 650 nm
35 (± 5) scans/sec (bi-directional)
42º (typical), 30º (narrow)
Linear
Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at
650 nm.
UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128, RSS, Code 39, Code 93, I
2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.
Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bidirectional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting.
Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4844 Lux).
Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles (86112 Lux).
1.35 mW
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
203
Chapter 7: Specifications
SE1224HP - High Performance Scanner
7.4.3.1 SE1224HP Decode Zones
204
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner
7.4.4
SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner
Parameter
Type
Light Source
Scan Rate
Scan Angle/Field of View
Scan Patterns
Minimum Print Contrast
Symbologies
Programmable Parameters
Ambient Light
Laser Output Power (peak)
Specification
Laser Class 2
Visible Laser Diode 650 nm
35 (±5) scans/sec (bi-directional).
13.5° ±0.7°
Linear
Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at
650 nm.
UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC.EAN128, RSS, Code 39, Code 93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.
Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode, Bidirectional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting.
Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux)
Sunlight: 4,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux).
1.26 mW
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
205
Chapter 7: Specifications
SE1524ER – Extended Range Scanner
7.4.4.1 SE1524ER Decode Zones
SE1524ER Decode Zone A (Short Range, Small Codes)
SE1524ER Decode Zone B (Long Range, Large Codes)
206
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
EV15 Imager
7.4.5
EV15 Imager
Parameter
Light Source
Scan Angle
Minimum Print Contrast
Minimum X. Dimension
Reading Distance
Symbologies
Ambient Light
7.4.5.1 EV15 Imager Decode Zone
Specification
617 nm highly visible LED
40º
Minimum 25%
0.1 mm (4 mils)
Up to 90 cm (35 in)
UPC (E&A), EAN, RSS, Code 39, Code 128, UCC/EAN 128,
ISBN, ISBT, Interleaved, Matrix, Industrial and Standard 2 of 5,
Codabar, Code 93/93i, Code 11, MSI, Plessey, Telepen, PDF417,
Micro PDF417
Works in any lighting conditions, from 0 to 100,000 lux
Mil Size
5
10
UPC
20
40
2.5
3
2
2.5
3
0 Lux to 100,000 Lux
Minimum Range
Inches
7
14
14.5
22
35.5
High quality symbols in normal room light.
Maximum Range
Inches
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
207
Chapter 7: Specifications
5080 Imager/Decoder
7.4.6
5080 Imager/Decoder
Parameter
Focal Point - SR
Focal Point - SF
Image Sensor
Motion Tolerance
Rotational Sensitivity
Viewing Angle
Ambient Light
Illumination LEDs
Aiming
Input Voltage - Imager
Input Voltage - 5080
Current Draw - Imager
Current Draw - 5080
Symbologies:
2 Dimensional
Linear
Postal
OCR Fonts
Specification
7 inches (17.8 cm) from lens plate
4.5 inches (11.4 cm) from lens plate
752 x 480 CMOS sensor
4 inches per second
360°
±40°
Total darkness to 100,000 lux (full sunlight)
626 nm ± 30 nm
LEDs: 526 nm ± 30 nm
Laser: 650 nm ± 10 nm
3.3 VDC ± 5% (23°C)
3.0 VDC to 5.5 VDC (23°C)
Max. Operating Current: 100 mA; Standby Current: 100
µA
Average Current (Interlaced Mode): 510 mA;
Standby Current: 120
µA
; Peak: 600 mA
PDF417, MicroPDF417, MaxiCode, Data Matrix, QR Code,
Aztec, Aztec Mesa, Code 49, UCC Composite
Code 39, Code 128, Codabar, UPC, EAN, Interleaved 2 of 5,
Reduced Space Symbology, Code 93, Codablock
Postnet (US), Planet Code, BPO 4 State, Canadian Post,
Japanese Post, KIX (Netherlands) Post
OCR-A and OCR-B
208
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Specifications
5080 Imager/Decoder
7.4.6.1 5080 Working Range
Data is characterized at 23
°
C (73.4
°
F) and 0 lux ambient light.
Symbology
SR
Linear
PDF417
UPC
Data Matrix
QR
MaxiCode
SF
PDF417
Linear
Data Matrix
QR
Linear
UPC
Size (mil)
8.3 (.020cm)
10 (.025cm)
13 (.033cm)
15 (.038cm)
15 (.038cm)
35 (.089cm)
6.6 (.017cm)
7.5 (.019cm)
12.5 (.021cm)
8.3 (.021cm)
10 Linear
13 (.033cm)
Near
3.5 in. (8.9cm)
3.1 in. (7.9cm)
2.1 in. (5.3cm)
2.3 in. (5.8cm)
3.1 in. (7.9cm)
2.0 in. (5.1cm)
2.8 in. (7.1cm)
2.5 in. (6.4cm)
3.4 in. (8.6cm)
3.4 in. (8.6cm)
2.2 in. (5.6cm)
2.0 in. (5.1cm)
Far
7.6 in. (19.3cm)
9 in. (22.9cm)
13.2 in. (33.5cm)
10.2 in. (25.9cm)
8.8 in. (22.4cm)
13.0 in. (33cm)
6 in. (15.2cm)
6.5 in. (16.5cm)
5.7 in. (14.5cm)
5.4 in. (13.7cm)
7.6 in. (19.3cm)
8.9 in. (22.6cm)
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
209
Chapter 7: Specifications
Accessories
7.5
Accessories
For details about the accessories available with Omnii, please refer to Chapter 6: “Peripheral
AC Wall Adaptor (Model No. ST1050)
12 VDC 2.5 A DC power supply.
Carrying Accessories
• Pistol grip.
• Carrying cases, either functional or non-functional.
• Hard and soft shell holsters.
• Hand and wrist straps.
• Forklift holster.
Communications with Power Supply
•
Desktop Docking Stations
-
ST4002 and ST4003:
- Fast charging of both internal battery and spare battery pack.
- Host USB port.
- Client USB port.
-
ST4003:
- A DE9M serial port (unpowered) and an RJ45 10Base-T Ethernet interface. Both compatible with the Omnii USB to Ethernet/serial drivers.
•
Snap Modules
-
Model No. ST3101
(Charger only variant): powers and charges the hand-held.
-
Model No. ST4001
(USB Host/Client variant): powers and charges the hand-held. It provides communications via USB 1.1/2.0 Host and USB 2.0 Client connectors and provides a DC IN port.
-
Model No. ST4500
(USB DE9M variant): through a powered DE9M serial connector it powers and charges the hand-held, and provides communications to tethered devices. The DE9M connector is capable of speeds up to 115,200 kbp.
7.6
Camera (Optional)
• Colour, 3 Megapixel autofocus, manual digital 4X zoom, 2xLED flash, video capable
(optional with or without PTT speaker).
210
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
A
PPENDIX
A
P
ORT
P
INOUTS
A.1 Docking Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.2 Battery Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-1
Appendix A: Port Pinouts
Docking Connector
A.1
Docking Connector
The docking interface on the base of Omnii is custom-designed to dock with a device via an array of spring-mounted pins.
The following are the pin assignments of the interface.
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
Pin #
Table A.1 Docking Connector Pinout
Signal
GROUND 11
DC_IN 12
DOCK_LOW_PWR 13
GROUND 14
USB_OTG_VBUS 15
CHARGE_IN 16
GROUND 17
DC_IN 18
USBH_P
USBH_M
19
20
Pin # Signal
USB_OTG_P
USB_OTG_M
CHARGE_IN
GROUND
DC_IN
UART_RX
GROUND
UART_TX
CHARGE_DATA
GROUND
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual A-3
Appendix A: Port Pinouts
Battery Contacts
A.2
Battery Contacts
Figure A.1 Battery Contact Pinout
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6
7
4
5
2
3
-
1
Pin # Signal Name
BATT-RAW
BATT-RAW
BATT-CLK
BATT-ID
BATT-DATA
GND
GND
Description
Positive lead of battery.
Plastic Rip - provides mechanical polarity.
Positive lead of battery.
SMBus data clock.
0 Ω to NEG.
SMBus bi-directional data line.
Negative lead of battery.
Negative lead of battery.
A-4 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
A
PPENDIX
B
W
IRELESS
Z
ERO
C
ONFIG
B.1 Wireless Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.1.1 Wireless Statistics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.1.2 Wireless Information Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.2 Assigning An IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.2.1 Name Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.3 Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.3.1 Rearranging Preferred Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.3.2 Deleting A Preferred Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B.3.3 Changing Network Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-1
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Information
B.1
Wireless Information
Wireless Zero Config
, the Windows native supplicant, can be used to configure the radio. To ensure that
Wireless Zero Config
is activated, refer to “Wi-Fi Config: Advanced Tab” on page 29.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections.
• Choose the
radio icon
representing the radio you want to set up—in the sample screen
in Figure B.2, this is labelled as
SDIO86861
Figure B.2 802.11 Wireless LAN Settings Window
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-3
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Statistics Tab
B.1.1
Wireless Statistics Tab
When you choose the
Wireless LAN
icon, an
802.11 Wireless LAN Settings
window is displayed. This tab lists your radio statistics. Choosing the
Zero
button resets the statistics of the last four items—Packets IN, Packets OUT, IN errors and OUT errors.
Figure B.3 Wireless Statistics
B.1.2
Wireless Information Tab
This tab displays existing networks to which you can connect, and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network.
•
Configure
button: To change the settings in an existing network, highlight the network you want to modify, and tap on the Configure button to display the Wireless Properties dialog box.
•
Connect
button: To force connection to a specific, existing network, highlight the network to which you want Omnii to connect, and tap on the
Connect
button.
B-4 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure B.4 Wireless Information Tab
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Information Tab
This tab lists available networks—any access points that are broadcasting an SSID, and it lists preferred networks—networks that you have configured. Since access points are generally secure, they will most likely not be listed here. By default, Omnii attempts to connect to preferred networks. This behaviour can be changed by enabling
Automatically connect to non-preferred networks
in the
Advanced
• To add a new configuration, tap on the
Add New
button. A blank
Wireless Properties
dialog box is displayed.
Wireless Properties
• Type the appropriate SSID (Service Set Identifier) in the
Network name (SSID):
dialog box. The
Network name
field can contain a maximum of 32 characters. The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-5
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Information Tab
Important: Keep in mind that Omnii will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID.
•
Ad Hoc And Infrastructure:
If you are using an
Infrastructure
network—one in which the hand-helds must pass data through an access point—leave the checkbox next to
This is an ad hoc network
blank.
If you are using an
Ad Hoc
network—a network in which the hand-helds pass data directly to other Ad Hoc devices without an access point—add a checkmark in the checkbox next to
This is an ad hoc network
to enable Ad Hoc.
•
Encryption:
WEP
(Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can choose
Disabled
from the drop-down encryption menu. Otherwise, leave this field as is.
AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) is a standard for protecting data through encryption. AES supports key sizes of 128 bits, 192 bits and 256 bits and will serve as a replacement for the Data Encryption Standard (DES), which has a key size of 56 bits. In addition to the increased security that comes with larger key sizes, the AES algorithm is a symmetrical block cipher that can encrypt (encipher) and decrypt (decipher) information.
•
Authentication:
802.11 supports several subtypes of network authentication services:
Open, Shared, WPA,
and
WPA-PSK
. Under
Open
authentication, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station.
Under
Shared
authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel.
Under
WPA
and
WPA-PSK
authentication, the use of 802.1x authentication is required.
For wireless networks
without
a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service
(RADIUS) infrastructure, WPA supports the use of a preshared key. For wireless networks
with
a RADIUS infrastructure, Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and
RADIUS is supported.
•
Network Key:
This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point.
To assign a
Network key
, highlight
The key is provided automatically
, and
uncheck
the checkbox to disable this option.
B-6 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure B.5 Network Key and Key Index
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Wireless Information Tab
•
Key Index:
This field is used to identify the WEP key.
Enter a value from
1
to
4
.
•
Enable 802.1x authentication:
802.1X
is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an
Ethernet network, whether wired or wireless. A security protocol packet such as TLS or
MD5 encapsulated in an
EAP
is used in conjunction with the 802.1X standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer. Available EAPs are listed in the drop-down menu next to the
EAP
option.
To activate 802.1X, highlight
802.1x authentication
, and check the checkbox.
•
EAP Type (Extensible Authentication Protocol):
This drop-down menu lists the EAP types available on your system. The items in this drop-down menu will vary depending on your network setup. Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select a Certificate. By selecting the
Properties
button, you will be able to select a
Certificate
. “Certificates” on page 88 provides a website that outlines how to
create certificates for your network.
•
Saving and exiting the radio setup:
Once you’ve completed the configuration, press
[ENTER], or tap on OK.
The connection you created will be listed in the
Wireless Information
tab as a preferred network. The radio will search for the SSID and compare the WEP and authentication information you specified. If there is a match between the hand-held settings and the access point settings, the hand-held will communicate on the network through the access point.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual B-7
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Assigning An IP Address
B.2
Assigning An IP Address
If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address. Refer to
“IP Address” on page 26 for details about assigning an IP address.
B.2.1
Name Server
Refer to “Name Server” on page 28 for details about this option.
B.3
Advanced Features
To display the
Advanced Wireless Settings
dialog box:
• Tap on the
Advanced
button in the
Wireless Information
This window lists the available preferred networks.
Figure B.6 Advanced Settings
B.3.1
Rearranging Preferred Networks
Omnii attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialog box in sequence, beginning at the top of the list. If you need to rearrange this list of networks—move networks up and down in the list:
• Tap in the
Networks List
, and highlight the
network
that you want to move up or down in the list.
• To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward, tap on the
Up
or
Down
button.
B-8 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix B: Wireless Zero Config
Deleting A Preferred Network
B.3.2
Deleting A Preferred Network
To delete a network from this list:
• In the
preferred networks
list, highlight the
network
you want to remove.
• Tap on the
Delete
button.
B.3.3
Changing Network Properties
To change the properties of an existing preferred network:
• Highlight the
network
that you want to modify.
• Tap on the
Properties
button.
• Make any necessary changes in the
Wireless Properties
dialog box, and press
[ENTER]
to save the changes.
B-9 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
A
PPENDIX
C
B
AR
C
ODE
S
ETTINGS
C.1 Bar Code Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C.1.1 Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
C.1.2 Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C.2 Decoded (Internal) Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.2.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
C.2.2 Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
C.2.3 Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C.2.4 Decoded (Internal) Data Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C.2.5 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.2.6 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.2.7 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C.2.8 EAN 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C.2.9 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C.2.10 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C.2.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C.2.12 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C.2.13 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C.2.14 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
C.2.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
C.2.17 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
C.2.18 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
C.2.19 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
C.2.20 Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
C.3 Decoded (Intermec ISCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
C.3.1 Decoded (ISCP) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
C.3.2 Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26
C.3.3 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
C.3.4 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-1
C.3.5 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
C.3.6 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
C.3.7 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
C.3.8 UPC E Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-31
C.3.9 UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-31
C.3.10 Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32
C.3.11 Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
C.3.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
C.3.13 Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
C.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-35
C.3.15 Matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-36
C.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-37
C.3.17 Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C.3.18 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
C.3.19 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-39
C.3.20 TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C.3.21 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-40
C.3.22 Micro PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-40
C.3.23 Codablock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-41
C.4 Imager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-42
C.4.1 Imager Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-42
C.4.2 Imager Advanced Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-43
C.4.3 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-46
C.4.4 Code 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-46
C.4.5 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-47
C.4.6 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-47
C.4.7 UPC A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-47
C.4.8 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-48
C.4.9 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-48
C.4.10 Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-48
C.4.11 Interleaved 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49
C.4.12 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49
C.4.13 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49
C.4.14 PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-50
C.4.15 Micro PDF-417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-50
C.4.16 2D Data Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-50
C-2 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
C.4.17 2D QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-51
C.4.18 2D Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-51
C.4.19 2D Aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-52
C.4.20 Postal: PlaNET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-52
C.4.21 Postal: PostNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-52
C.4.22 Postal: Australian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-52
C.4.23 Postal: Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-53
C.4.24 Postal: Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-53
C.4.25 Postal: Royal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-53
C.4.26 Postal: Kix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-54
C.4.27 Postal: Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-54
C.5 Non-Decoded Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-54
C.5.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-55
C.5.2 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-56
C.5.3 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-57
C.5.4 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-58
C.5.5 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-59
C.5.6 UPC A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-60
C.5.7 UPC E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-60
C.5.8 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-61
C.5.9 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-62
C.5.10 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-62
C.5.11 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-63
C.5.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-64
C.5.13 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-64
C.5.14 IATA 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-65
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-3
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Scanner Options
C.1
Bar Code Settings
The
Teklogix Scanners
icon in the
Control Panel
provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor bar code scanner configurations and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize.
The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the
unit. For a listing of available scanners and their specifications, please refer to Chapter 7:
Note: To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
For information on configuring the Options, Translations, and Ports settings, see
“Teklogix Scanners” on page 149.
C.1.1
Scanner Options
The drop-down menu to the right of the
Scanner
option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types, depending on what is installed in/on your hand-held:
Decoded
(internal),
Decoded
(Intermec ISCP),
Imager
, and
Non-decoded
.
The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the bar codes it supports. Always defer to your bar code scanner’s programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-5
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Restoring Default Settings
Note: Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types. The type of scanner installed can be determined from the
System
icon in the Control
Panel, under the System Properties tab.
Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to ‘on’) only those codes that are required by the application.
Keep in mind that some bar code types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed. All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes.
C.1.2
Restoring Default Settings
If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters, or all scanner parameters.
• Press and hold on a symbology (e.g., Code 128) to display a pop up a menu.
• Choose
Default subtree
to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected, or choose
Default all settings
to reset all scanner parameters to default settings.
To reset a single parameter to its default setting:
• Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset.
C-6 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Options
• Choose
Default parameter
to reset the parameter to the default setting.
C.2
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
• Tap on the
Scanner
drop-down menu, and choose
Decoded (internal)
.
C.2.1
Options
Note: Some options are available only for specific scanners. Refer to the option names in this section for scanner model identification.
Dot Time (msec)
The value selected for Dot Time (msec) determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you double-tap
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-7
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options
on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of
0 msec
,
200 msec
or
400 msec
. A value of
0
(zero) disables the target dot.
Aim Duration
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from
0
to
30
(0 to 3 sec.). A value of
0
(zero) disables the aiming-dot.
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between
5
and
99.
The value is measured in tenths of seconds.
C.2.2
Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options
Continuous Scan Mode
Setting this parameter to
on
keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down.
Minimum Cancel Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off.
Power Mode
This parameter is a power-saving option. Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options:
Continuous Power
and
Low Power
.
In
Continuous Power
mode, the scanner is always on, waiting for a trigger pull or serial communication.
In
Low Power
mode, the scanner is in a standby state, drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial communication wakes it. Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applications, there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a bar code.
C-8 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Decoded (Internal) Advanced Options
Low Power Timeout
To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned—a successful decode restores normal flashing.
This is only used if the unit’s
Trigger Mode
has been changed to
Continuous On
. If the unit is used in a fixed mount this parameter might be used, but not if the unit is used as a hand-held.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of
30 sec
.,
1 min
.,
2 min
. or
3 min
.
Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and
Omnii is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to
on
enables decoding of parameter bar codes.
Linear Security Level
This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your bar code quality.
There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39,
Interleaved 2 of 5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of bar code quality. As security levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from
1
to
4
.
Linear security level
1
specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Code Type
Codabar
MSI Plessey
D 5 of 5
I 2 of 5
All
4 or less
8 or less
8 or less
Length
Linear security level
2
specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-9
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options
Linear security level
3
specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
Code Type
MSI Plessey
D 2 of 5
I 2 of 5
4 or less
8 or less
8 or less
Length
Linear security level
4
requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded.
Bi-Direction Redundancy
Note: This parameter is only valid if a “Linear Security Level” is enabled.
When this parameter is enabled, a bar code must be successfully scanned in both directions
(forward and reverse) before being decoded.
Scan Angle
This option allows you to choose from two scan angles:
Normal Angle
or
Alternate Angle
.
Choosing
Normal Angle
allows the normal operation for scanning long range and short range. Choosing
Alternate Angle
widens the beam to allow scanning of long bar codes at short range but at the cost of long range scanning.
C.2.3
Decoded (Internal) 2D Scanning Options
Scanning Mode
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose one of the following scanning modes:
Smart Raster
,
Always Raster
,
Programmable Raster
,
Slab Pattern
,
Cyclone Pattern
, or
Semi-Omni Pattern
.
Raster Height and Raster Expand Rate
These parameters determine the laser pattern’s height and rate of expansion.
Note: These parameters are only used when either Programmable Raster or
Always Raster is assigned to the “2D Scanning Mode” parameter. “2D Raster
Height” and “2D Raster Expand Rate” are intended for very specific applications and are usually not required for normal scanning purposes.
C-10 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Decoded (Internal) Data Options
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes in which you can enter a value from
1
to
15
.
C.2.4
Decoded (Internal) Data Options
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code:
None
,
AIM
or
Symbol
.
Scan Data Format
This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format.
Double-tapping on
Scan Data Format
displays the following options from which you can choose a data format:
data (as-is), data [S1], data [S2], data [S1][S2], [P] data, [P] data
[S1], [P] data [S2] and [P] data [S1][S2]
.
Prefix [P], Suffix [S1] and Suffix [S2]
A prefix and/or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing.
When you double-tap on these parameters, dialog boxes are displayed in which you can enter a value from
0
to
255
.
Delete Char Set ECIs
Setting this parameter to
on
enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing
Character Set ECIs (Extended Channel Interpretations [also known as GLIs]) from its buffer before transmission.
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 bar codes containing Character Set ECIs, even when the ECI Protocol is disabled.
ECI Decoder
Setting this parameter to
on
enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations (ECIs) supported by the scanner. This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECIs.
If this parameter is set to
off
and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned, the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-11
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Code 39
C.2.5
Code 39
Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “Code 39”.
Enable Trioptic Code 39
Note: “Trioptic Code 39” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.
Trioptic Code 39 symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to
on
allows this type of symbology to be recognized.
Convert To Code 32
Note: “Code 39” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.
Setting this parameter to
on
allows the scanner to convert the bar code from “Code 39” to
“Code 32”.
Code 32 Prefix
Note: “Convert to Code 32” must be enabled in order for this parameter to function.
When this parameter is enabled, the prefix character “A” is added to all “Code 32” bar codes.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Code 39” can be set for
Any length
,
Length within a range
,
One discrete length
or
Two discrete lengths
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes labelled
Set Code Lengths
where you can define the code length that will be decoded by your scanner.
C-12 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Code 39
Choosing
One discrete length
allows you to decode only those codes containing a selected length. Choosing
Two discrete lengths
allows you to decode only those codes containing two selected lengths.
Length within a range
allows you to decode a code type within a specified range from
2
to
55
.
Check Digit Verification
When this parameter is enabled, the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Note: Only those “Code 39” symbols that include a MOD 43 check digit are decoded when this parameter is enabled.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Decode Performance
If this parameter is enabled, one of three decode levels can be chosen in the
Decode Performance Level
parameter.
Decode Perf. Level
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code
39 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation—this is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between
1
and
3
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-13
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Code 39
Length Restriction
The parameters in this sub-menu allow you to define the length of the bar codes that will be decoded using either the
Field Size
parameter or the
Minimum Size
and
Maximum Size
parameters (see below). The order of operation to either match the
Field Size
or determine if the length falls between the
Minimum Size
and
Maximum Size
is as follows:
• Strip the leading and trailing characters.
• Add the prefix and suffix characters.
• Count the number of characters remaining to either match the field size or determine if the length falls between the minimum and maximum size.
Field Size
When a value is assigned for this parameter, only bar codes that match the field size exactly can be transmitted. If a value is assigned to this parameter, a
Minimum Size
and
Maximum
Size
value is not required.
Minimum Size and Maximum Size
When a value is assigned to these parameters, only bar code lengths that fall between the minimum and maximum value can be decoded. If values are assigned to these parameters, a
Field Size
value is not required.
Add/Remove Data
Prefix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Suffix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Strip Leading
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.
Note: For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed
before
the “Strip Leading”.
C-14 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Code 128
Strip Trailing
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.
C.2.6
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 128”.
Enable GS1-128/GS1 US
Previously UPC/EAN and UCC, the GS1-128/GS1 US types of bar code include group separators and start codes.
Enable ISBT 128
To successfully scan this type of bar code, this option must be set to
on
.
Decode Performance
If this parameter is set to
on
, one of three decode levels assigned to the
Decode Performance
Level
parameter can be selected.
Decode Perf. Level
This parameter provides three levels of decode performance or “aggressiveness” for Code
128 symbols. Increasing the performance level reduces the amount of required bar code orientation, allowing you to scan at an angle horizontal to the bar code. This is useful when scanning very long and/or truncated bar codes. Keep in mind that increased levels reduce decode security. There is a limitation that it can only be used with one fixed length.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a decode performance level of between
1
and
3
.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-15
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
EAN 13
C.2.7
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 13”.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.8
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 8”.
EAN-8 Zero Extend
When this parameter is enabled, five leading zeros are added to decoded EAN-8 symbols, making them compatible in format to EAN-13 symbols. Disabling this parameter returns
EAN-8 symbols to their normal format.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.9
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC A”.
UPC-A, Check Digit
If you enable this parameter, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
UPC-A, Preamble
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-A symbols transmitted to the host device:
System Char
—system character transmitted with the data,
Country Code and System Char
—both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are transmitted with the data, or
None
—no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.
C-16 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
UPC E
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.10 UPC E
Enabled UPC-E
Set this parameter to
on
to allow “UPC E” bar code scans.
Enabled UPC-E1
Set this parameter to
on
to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
UPC-E and UPC-E1 Check Digit
If you enable one or both of these parameters, a check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
UPC-E and UPC-E1 Preamble
When you double-tap on one of these parameters, a dialog box is displayed where you can choose one of three options for lead-in characters for UPC-E and UPC-E1 symbols transmitted to the host device:
System Char
—system character transmitted with the data,
Country Code and System Char
—both the country code (“0” for USA) and system character are transmitted with the data, or
None
—no preamble is transmitted. The lead-in characters are considered part of the symbol.
Conv. UPC-E To UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC-E1 (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-17
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
C.2.11 UPC/EAN Shared Settings
The parameters you set here are a shared across all available UPC and EAN bar codes.
Enable Bookland EAN
Setting this parameter to
on
allows your scanner to recognize Bookland EAN bar codes.
Supplementals
Supplementals
are additionally appended characters (2 or 5).
Double-tapping this parameter displays a list of options. If Ignore is chosen, UPC/EAN is decoded and the supplemental characters are ignored. If Decode is chosen, UPC/EAN symbols are decoded with supplementals. Autodiscriminate works in conjunction with the
Supp. Redundancy
parameter.
Supp. Redundancy
With “Autodiscriminate” selected in the
Supplementals
parameter,
Supp. Redundancy
adjusts the number of times a symbol without supplementals is decoded before transmission.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog is displayed in which you can enter a value between
2
and
20
. A value of 5 or above is recommended when Autodiscriminate is selected and you are decoding a mix of UPC/EAN symbols with and without supplementals.
Security Level
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge UPC/EAN bar codes.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose a level from
0
to
3
. Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code.
Linear Decode
Linear Decode
applies to code types containing two adjacent blocks (e.g., UPC-A, EAN-8,
EAN-13). When enabled (set to
on
), a bar code is transmitted only when both the left and right blocks are successfully decoded within one laser scan. This option should be enabled when bar codes are in proximity to each other.
2D UPC Half Block Stitching
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “UPC Half Block Stitching” for an omnidirectional engine only.
C-18 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Code 93
C.2.12 Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 93”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Code 93” can be set for
Any Length
,
Length within a range
,
One discrete length
or
Two discrete lengths
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters
(i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled
Set Code Lengths
where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing
One discrete length
allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified length. Choosing
Two discrete lengths
allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that may be decoded.
Length within a range
allows you to decode any bar code with a length that falls within a specified range (e.g. between
10
and
15
characters). The minimum and maximum values for the range are
4
and
55
, respectively.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.13 Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Codabar”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set for
Any length
,
Length within a range
,
One discrete length
or
Two discrete lengths
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled
Set Code Lengths
where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing
One discrete length
allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified length. Choosing
Two discrete lengths
allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that may be decoded.
Length within a range
allows you to decode any bar code with a length
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-19
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
MSI Plessey
that falls within a specified range (e.g. between
10
and
15
characters). The minimum and maximum values for the range are
5
and
55
, respectively.
CLSI Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters and inserts a space after the first, fifth, and tenth characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol.
Note: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
NOTIS Editing
When enabled, this parameter strips the start and stop characters from decoded
Codabar symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.14 MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “MSI Plessey”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “MSI Plessey” can be set for
Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or
Two discrete lengths
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled
Set Code Lengths
where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing
One discrete length
allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified length. Choosing
Two discrete lengths
allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that may be decoded.
Length within a range
allows you to decode any bar code with a length that falls within a specified range (e.g. between
10
and
15
characters). The minimum and maximum values for the range are
6
and
55
, respectively.
C-20 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Interleaved 2 of 5
Check Digits
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose
One
or
Two
check digit(s).
If this parameter is set to
One
, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If “Check
Digits” is set to
Two
, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.
Note: If
Two check digits
is selected, an MSI Plessey “Check Digit Algorithm” must also be selected. See below for details.
Transmit Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.
Check Digit Algorithm
When the
Two MSI Plessey
check digits option is selected, an additional verification is required to ensure integrity. Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose the algorithm to be used:
MOD 10/MOD 11
or
MOD 10/MOD 10
.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.15 Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set for
Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length
or
Two discrete lengths
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters
(i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled
Set Code Lengths
where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing
One discrete length
allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified length. Choosing
Two discrete lengths
allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that may be decoded.
Length within a range
allows you to decode any bar code with a length
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-21
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
Discrete 2 of 5
that falls within a specified range (e.g. between
10
and
15
characters). The minimum and maximum values for the range are
4
and
14
, respectively.
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm: either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).
Transmit Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the bar code data.
Convert To EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, an I 2 of 5 bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.16 Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Set Length L1 and Set Length L2
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set for
Any length, Length within a range, One discrete length or Two discrete lengths
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box labelled
Set Code Lengths
where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Choosing
One discrete length
allows you to decode only those bar codes of a specified length. Choosing
Two discrete lengths
allows you to specify two lengths of bar codes that may be decoded.
Length within a range
allows you to decode any bar code with a length that falls within a specified range (e.g. between
10
and
15
characters). The minimum and maximum values for the range are
1
and
12
, respectively.
C-22 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.17 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Enable
Setting any of these parameters to
on
enables “2D RSS Code” scanning capability.
Enable RSS-14 (Reduced Space Symbology)
RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the nominal height of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.
Enable RSS Limited
“RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade item number) that begin with either a
0
or a
1
. It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni-directionally.
Enable RSS Expanded
“RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but it can be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the symbol, while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded” code can be omnidirectionally scanned.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.18 Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar
Code Only” must be disabled (see page C-42).
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-23
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Internal) Scanners
PDF-417
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners. The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a composite symbol.
Enable CC-C and Enable CC-AB
To activate these components, set the parameters to
on
.
Enable TLC-39
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code. Setting this parameter to
on
enables this parameter.
C.2.19 PDF-417
Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.2.20 Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “2D Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-
417 is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF-417.
Code 128 Emulation
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:
]C1
if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2
if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0
if the first codeword is 910 or 911
C-24 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Decoded (ISCP) Options
If Code 128 Emulation is set to off, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:
]L3
if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4
if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5
if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
• Tap on the
Scanner
drop-down menu, and choose
Decoded (Intermec ISCP).
C.3.1
Decoded (ISCP) Options
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between
1
and
10
seconds.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-25
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options
C.3.2
Decoded (ISCP) Advanced Options
Continuous Scan Mode
Setting this parameter to
on
keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down.
Minimum Cancel Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off, once the scanner trigger or button is released. This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on/off.
Low Power Timeout
To extend laser life, you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode. The scanner wakes from low power mode when a bar code is scanned—a successful decode restores normal flashing.
When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of
30 sec, 1 min, 2 min
, or
3 min
.
Note: This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to
Continuous On
and the unit is mounted in a fixed position; otherwise, ‘Low Power Timeout’ is not used.
Parameter Scanning
Setting this parameter to
Enabled
allows decoding of parameter bar codes.
Same Read Validate
The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result. The value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required, from
0
to
10
times.
Same Read Timeout
Prevents the same bar code from being read more than once. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from
0
to
2550 msec
.
Diff Read Timeout
Prevents unwanted reading of other bar codes on the same label. The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout, from
0
to
2550 msec
.
C-26 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Code 39
Add AIM ID Prefix
The
AIM ID
(Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international bar code identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the
AIM ID
is inserted at the beginning of the decoded bar code.
C.3.3
Code 39
Enable
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “Code 39”.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters
+
,
%
, and
/
are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Reading Range
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The default setting,
Extended
, allows for increased reading distance.
Start/Stop Transmit
Setting this parameter to
on
enables the transmission of start and stop characters, which are usually not transmitted. Code 39 can start and end with either a
*
or a
$
character (see also the next parameter).
Accepted Start Char
This parameter allows you the option of using one of the two start/stop characters or both (
$
char,
*
char,
$
and
*
char).
Check Digit Verification
Uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted. The available options are:
Disabled, MOD 43 Check, French CIP
, or
Italian CIP
.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing
7 characters.
Italian CIP (Italian pharmaceutical) is also known as Code 32. It is transmitted as a standard Code 39 if checksum is not validated.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-27
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Code 128
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.4
Code 128
Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “Code 128”.
GS1-128
“GS1-128” is the GS1 implementation of the Code 128 barcode specification. The former correct name was UCC/EAN-128.
GS1-128 Identifier
“GS1-128 Identifier” allows the AIM ID “ ]C1” for EAN 128 to be transmitted or removed.
By default, this identifier is transmitted if EAN 128 is enabled.
GTIN Compliant
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes.
FNC1 Conversion
“FNC1 Conversion” allows the FNC1 character to be converted to another character for applications that cannot use the default <GS> Group Separator or hex (1d).
Double-tapping on this option displays a dialog box listing the allowable range:
0
to
255
.
C-28 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Code 128
Enable ISBT 128
To successfully scan this type of bar code (International Society of Blood Transfusion), this option must be set to
on
. If you enable this type of bar code, Code 128/EAN 128 is deactivated to avoid any confusion.
ISBT Concat Transmit
The codes are not concatenated by default. You need to choose one of the options provided for this parameter to send concatenated code. Choosing
Only Concatenated Codes
transmits only concatenated codes—single codes will not be transmitted. Choosing
Concatenated or
Single
transmits single codes or concatenated codes. If only one code of a pair is read, that code will be transmitted as a single code. If both codes in a pair are detected, they will be concatenated provided that “ISBT Concat Any Pair” (see below) is enabled.
ISBT Concat Any Pair
Enabling this parameter causes all code pairs that can be, to be concatenated even if they do not comply with Section 4.1 of the “ISBT 128 Bar Code Symbology and Application Specification for Labeling of Whole Blood and Blood Components” (June 2000, Version 1.2.1).
Reading Range
Determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The default setting,
Extended
, allows for increased reading distance.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are
Disabled
or
French CIP
. This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing
7 characters.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-29
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
EAN 13
C.3.5
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 13”.
ISBN Conversion
When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters
(‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.6
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 8”.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Convert To EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, an EAN 8 bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.7
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC A” bar code scanning recognition.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
C-30 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
UPC E Settings
Transmit Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data.
Convert To EAN 13
If this parameter is enabled, a UPC A bar code is converted to EAN 13.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.8
UPC E Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC E”.
Enable UPC-E1
Set this parameter to
on
to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Transmit Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data.
Convert To UPC-A
This parameter converts UPC E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC A format before transmission. After conversion, data follows UPC A format and is affected by UPC A programming selections (e.g. Check Digit).
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.9
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
The setting assigned to the “Addendum” parameter associated with this option is shared across all UPC and EAN bar codes.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-31
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Code 93
Addendum
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides two options:
Not Required but Transmitted if Read
or
Required and Transmitted
.
• Double-tap on
Addendum
to display a dialog box listing your options.
• Highlight an item, and tap on
OK
.
When “Addendum” is set to
Not Required but Transmitted if Read
, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to
Required and Transmitted
, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.
Addendum Add-on 2 and Addendum Add-on 5
Enabling these parameters sets the length of the addendum bar code to either 2 or
5 characters.
Addendum Security
If you tap on “Addendum Security”, a dialog box is displayed in which you can define the security level of add-on 2 or add-on 5 with a value from
0
to
100
. As security levels increase, the scanner decode speed decreases.
GTIN Compliant
GTIN (global trade item number) processing transmits EAN 128 as the 14-character
EAN/UCC GTIN. To use GTIN processing, you must activate the EAN 128 symbology.
Important: When EAN 128 and GTIN processing are both activated, it is not possible to read normal EAN 128 Codes.
Reading Range
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The default setting,
Extended
, allows for increased reading distance.
C.3.10 Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 93”.
C-32 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Codabar
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.11 Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Codabar”.
Start/Stop Transmit
Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters: a, b, c, d
A, B, C, D a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4
Thus, when a set is chosen, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be one of those characters and the body of the message should not contain these characters. Setting this parameter to
Not Transmitted
strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.
CLSI Library System
When enabled, spaces are inserted after characters 1, 5, 10 in the 14-character label (used in the USA by libraries using the CLSI system).
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of a symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm—either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical
Product Code Council).
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-33
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
MSI Plessey
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for “Codabar” can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can choose to set L1 as
Minimum Length
or L1,L2,L3 as
Fixed Length
.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.12 MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “MSI”.
Enable Plessy
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Plessy”.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are MOD 10 Check and Double MOD 10 Check.
This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Plessy Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the Plessy data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
C-34 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Code 11
Plessy Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the Plessy bar code can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.13 Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 11”.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are
MOD 10 Check
and
Double MOD 10
Check
.This parameter uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.14 Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-35
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Matrix 2 of 5
Reading Range
This parameter determines the reading distance from which a bar code can be successfully scanned. The default setting,
Extended
, allows for increased reading distance.
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are
Disabled, MOD 10 Check
and
French CIP
.
“Check Digit Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Note: French CIP (French pharmaceutical) is only used with bar codes containing
7 characters.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for “Interleaved 2 of 5” can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can chose to set L1 as
Minimum Length
or L1,L2,L3 as
Fixed Length
.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.15 Matrix 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.
C-36 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Discrete 2 of 5
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.16 Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Standard 2 of 5 Format
This parameter allows you to choose a standard format—either
Identicon
(6 start/stop bars) or
Computer Identics
(4 start/stop bars).
Check Digit Verification
The available options for this parameter are
Disabled
and
MOD 10 Check
. “Check Digit
Verification” uses the specified algorithm of the option you've chosen to ensure the integrity of the symbol data before transmitting. If the data does not contain that algorithm, the data is not transmitted.
Transmit Check Digit
If the check digit is to be transmitted with the data, this parameter must be enabled.
Set Length L1, Set Length L2, and Set Length L3
Lengths for “Discrete 2 of 5” can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Double-tapping on these parameters displays dialog boxes where you can define the code length that will be recognized by your scanner.
Length Mode
You can chose to set L1 as
Minimum Length
or L1,L2,L3 as
Fixed Length
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-37
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Telepen
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.17 Telepen
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Telepen”.
Format
This parameter allows you to set the bar code character format to either
ASCII
or
Numeric
.
Minimum Length
Minimum lengths for the bar code can be set from
0
to
255
. The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s).
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.18 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Enable
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.
Enable RSS-14
RSS-14 code can be either purely linear or split in half with one half stacked on top of the other half. Stacking the code reduces the bar code length, and providing the nominal height of the code is maintained, it can be omni-directionally scanned.
Enable RSS Limited
‘RSS-Limited” is restricted, in that it can only encode 14 digit GTINs (global trade item numbers) that begin with either 0 or 1. It is not stackable and is not designed to be read omni-directionally.
C-38 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Composite
Enable RSS Expanded
‘RSS Expanded” uses the same application identifiers as UCC/EAN-128 codes but they can be split into sections and stacked several rows high, reducing the length of the symbol, while increasing the capacity of data that can be stored. “RSS Expanded” code can be omni-directionally scanned.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.19 Composite
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled. In addition, “Center Bar
Code Only” must be disabled (see page C-42).
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.
The options available for this parameter represent multi-level components of a composite symbol.
Enable CC-C and Enable CC-AB
To activate these components, set these parameters to
on
.
Linear Transmission Only
When
Linear Transmission Only
is enabled, only the linear code portion of the composite bar code is transmitted when scanned.
UPC-EAN Composite Message
This option allows you to choose how UPC-EAN shared bar codes are transmitted:
Always
Linked
,
Never Linked
or
Auto-discriminate
.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-39
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
TLC-39
C.3.20 TLC-39
Enabled
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear Code 39 symbol.
Setting this parameter to
on
enables this parameter.
Linear Transmission Only
When
Linear Transmission Only
is enabled, only the linear portion of the composite bar code is transmitted when scanned.
Security Level
This parameter is used to differentiate between TLC-39 and standard Code 39. Tapping on
Security Level
displays a dialog box in which you can assign a value from
0
to
100
. The higher the value assigned, the lower the decode rate.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.21 PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D PDF-417”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.22 Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D Micro PDF-417”.
C-40 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Decoded (Intermec ISCP)
Codablock
Code 128 Emulation
When this parameter is enabled, the scanner transmits data from certain Micro PDF-417 symbols as if it was encoded in Code 128 symbols.
If Code 128 Emulation is enabled, the following Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
If Code 128 Emulation is set to
off
, the Micro PDF-417 symbols are transmitted with one of the following prefixes:
]L3 if the first codeword is 903-907, 912, 914, 915
]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.3.23 Codablock
Enable Codablock A
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Codablock type A”.
Enable Codablock F
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Codablock type F”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-41
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
Imager Options
C.4
Imager
• Tap on the
Scanner
drop-down menu, and choose
Imager
.
C.4.1
Imager Options
TekImager Enabled
Setting this option to
on
enables the imager installed in your hand-held.
Continuous Scan Mode
Setting this parameter to
on
keeps image capture active and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down.
Center Barcode Only
Note: This parameter must be disabled when reading Composite bar codes.
When more than one bar code is visible in a single snap shot, this parameter allows you to specify that only the centre image within the imager framing marker be read. When this parameter is set to
on
, the target dot is pointed at the centre image and only that image is returned.
Max Number Barcodes
Specifies the maximum number of bar codes the imager attempts to decode in an image. A maximum of 6 bar codes can be decoded at one time.
C-42 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
Imager Advanced Options
Barcodes Must Decode
This parameter specifies the minimum number of bar codes that the imager must decode in order to report success.
Note: This number must be less than the number of bar codes assigned to Max Number
Barcodes. The driver validates and reassigns the value if necessary.
Window Width
“Window Width” determines the width of the captured image in pixels.
Note: The driver will validate and reassign the value assigned to this parameter, if necessary; the driver will also use the Window Width value to horizontally center the image in the field of view.
Window Height
This parameter determines the height of the captured image in pixels.
Note: The driver will validate and reassign the value assigned to this parameter, if necessary; the driver will also use Window Height value to vertically center the image in the field of view.
Dot Time (msec)
The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner begins capturing images. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of between
0
and
3000
.
A value of
0
disables the target dot.
C.4.2
Imager Advanced Options
Important: Do not adjust the advanced options without first consulting Psion Teklogix technical support.
Factory Defaults On Reboot
The value assigned to this parameter determines whether or not the driver will restore the factory defaults to the imager device on the next reboot.
Note: The driver will default the imager device on a ‘clean’ reset, regardless of the value of this parameter.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-43
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
Imager Advanced Options
Min Scan Duration
This parameter defines the minimum amount of time in seconds that the imager will scan when the trigger is pressed and held down without successful decode.
Note: The actual scan duration when the trigger is pressed relies on the value assigned to
“Captures Per HW Trigger”, below.
Captures Per HW Trigger
The value assigned to this parameter determines the number of captures the imager device will take while the imager's internal hardware trigger is held down.
Note: This parameter, together with “Min Scan Duration”, determines the actual scan duration. When the scan trigger is pressed and held down, the driver starts a timer based on the value of “Min Scan Duration” and also sends a command to emulate the hardware trigger. When completed, if the time has not yet expired, it will send another command to the imager device, forcing the imager to flash again using the value assigned to “Captures Per HW Trigger”.
Auto Exposure
Important: This parameter value should only be changed by qualified Psion Teklogix personnel. It should be left at the default value: on.
Setting this parameter to
on
allows the imager to make automatic gain, integration and illumination adjustments based on ambient light before capturing the bar code. If the adjustment is insufficient, further adjustments are made automatically before another image is captured.
Fast Converge
Note: “Auto Exposure” must be set to
on
in order for this parameter to function.
Keep in mind that while this parameter can improve imager performance, “Fast
Converge” increases battery power consumption.
Setting this parameter to
on
speeds the “Auto Exposure” process. It allows the imager to rapidly snap a number of bar code capture attempts while finding ideal values for gain, integration and illumination.
C-44 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
Imager Advanced Options
Max Gain, Max Integration and Max Illumination
Important: These parameter values should only be changed by qualified Psion
Teklogix personnel.
These parameters represent internal values used by the 2D imager. The “Auto Exposure” parameter automatically adjusts the
Max Gain, Max Integration
and
Max Illumination
parameters to produce the best bar code read. Keep in mind that “Auto Exposure” must be set to
on
in order for these parameter values to be automatically adjusted.
Double-tapping on any of these parameters displays an associated dialog box in which an allowable range is displayed:
Max Gain
–
357
to
7920
,
Max Integration
–
0
to
65535
,
Max Illumination
–
0
to
7
.
Decoder Timeout
The decoder is a set of algorithms that examine the image and attempt to find the bar codes, and then turn the pixels into data that the computer can use—this process takes time. “Decoder Timeout” limits the amount of time the decoder will spend attempting to decode an image, and forces it to stop and grab a new image, which will probably be easier to decode.
Note: When decoding multiple bar codes in one image, the value assigned to ‘Decoder
Timeout’ should be increased to 200ms/extra bar code after the first.
Adaptive Windowing
“Adaptive Windowing” is an advanced technique used to speed up bar code recognition in certain applications. This parameter automatically reduces the size of the window to the user-programmed window size when it successfully decodes (which reduces decode time the next time it is used), but increases it to the full size window on a failed decode.
Note: This feature assumes that you have reached an understanding about how the device operates in your application, and that, after a learning period, operators will get used to using the imager in one particular way. It also assumes that a trained operator will usually only have near miss scenarios.
Constant Illumination
“Constant Illumination” is used to reduce the intrusiveness of the device’s illumination on the observer. Instead of the illumination turning on and off every time the device attempts a decode (2-4 times per second), the illumination stays on from the time the trigger is pulled until a decode is successful. This feature is useful in low light environments, since it will also reduce the distraction that the illumination can have on nearby co-workers.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-45
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
Code 39
C.4.3
Code 39
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 39”.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Check Digit Verification
When this parameter is enabled, the integrity of a “Code 39” symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Note: Only those “Code 39” symbols that include a MOD 43 check digit are decoded when this parameter is enabled.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.4
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 128.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C-46 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
EAN 13
C.4.5
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 13”.
Addendum
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options:
Disabled, Optional
and
Required
. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.
• Double-tap on
Addendum
to display a dialog box listing your options.
• Highlight an item, and tap on
OK
.
When “Addendum” is set to
Disabled
, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to
Optional
, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to
Required
, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.
Note: Setting “Addendum” to ‘Optional’ reduces performance. It should only be chosen if at least some of the bar codes being read have addendums.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.6
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 8”.
Addendum
Refer to “Addendum” on page C-47.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.7
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC A”.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-47
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
UPC E
Addendum
Refer to “Addendum” on page C-47.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.8
UPC E
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC E”.
Addendum
Refer to “Addendum” on page C-47.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.9
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 93”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.10 Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Codabar”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C-48 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
Interleaved 2 of 5
C.4.11 Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Check Digit Verification
When enabled, this parameter checks the integrity of an I 2 of 5 symbol to ensure it complies with a specified algorithm—either USS (Uniform Symbology Specification) or OPCC (Optical Product Code Council).
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is transmitted along with the I 2 of 5 symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.12 RSS Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Enable
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “RSS Code” scanning capability.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.13 Composite
A composite symbol includes multi-row 2D components making it compatible with linear and area CCD scanners along with linear and rastering laser scanners.
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Composite” bar code scanner.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-49
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
PDF-417
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies included in the composite must be enabled. In addition, “Center Barcode
Only” must be disabled (see page C-42).
C.4.14 PDF-417
Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
enables PDF-417 two dimensional (2D) coding.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.15 Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “Micro PDF-417” bar code scanning. Micro PDF-417 is a multi-row symbology that is useful for applications requiring greater area efficiency but lower data capacity than PDF-417.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.16 2D Data Matrix
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D Data Matrix”.
Inverse Video Mode
Enabling this parameter allows the imager to read inverse bar codes—white symbols presented on a black background.
C-50 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
2D QR Code
Rectangular
Enabling this parameter allows the imager to recognize rectangular (as opposed to square) symbols.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.17 2D QR Code
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D QR Code”.
Inverse Video Mode
Enabling this parameter allows the imager to read inverse bar codes—white symbols presented on a black background.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.18 2D Maxicode
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D Maxicode”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-51
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
2D Aztec
C.4.19 2D Aztec
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Aztec”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.20 Postal: PlaNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.21 Postal: PostNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: PostNET”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.22 Postal: Australian
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Australian”.
C-52 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Imager
Postal: Japanese
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.23 Postal: Japanese
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Japanese”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.24 Postal: Korean
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Korean”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.25 Postal: Royal
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Royal”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-53
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
Postal: Kix
C.4.26 Postal: Kix
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Kix”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.4.27 Postal: Canadian
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Canadian”.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5
Non-Decoded Scanners
Figure C.1 Non-Decoded Scanner Options
• Tap on the
Scanner
drop-down menu, and choose
Non-decoded
.
C-54 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
Options
All the available bar code symbologies for this type of scanner can be selected in this tab.
A ‘plus’ sign (+) to the left of the menu item indicates that a sub-menu of parameters is attached.
• Tap on the + sign to display the sub-menu.
• To change a parameter value, double-tap on the parameter. If you need to type a value, a dialog box is displayed in which you can type a new value. If you need to change a yes or no value, double-tapping on the parameter toggles between yes and no.
If you’re using the keyboard:
• Highlight the bar code you want to work with, and press the [RIGHT] arrow key to display the sub-menu.
• Use the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys to highlight a parameter.
• To change a parameter value, press [SPACE] or the [RIGHT] arrow key. If a field requires text entry, a text box is displayed in which you can enter the appropriate value.
C.5.1
Options
• Tap on the + sign next to
Options
to display these parameters.
Dot Time (msec)
The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. When you doubletap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to
3000. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.
Short Code
When enabled, this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes (2 characters).
When disabled, these short bar codes are rejected.
Enabling “Short Code” may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the hand-held must decode more potential bar codes; it is therefore not recommended for general-purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters.
Verify
The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode, prior to a bar code being accepted. Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code but also improve the reliability of the decoded bar code.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-55
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
Code 39
Security
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge bar codes (Code 93, Code
128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code. The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting.
C.5.2
Code 39
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 39”.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
AIAG Strip
If this parameter is enabled, the AIAG data identifier is removed from each decoded Code
39 label. The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the Code 39 start character. It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character. This identifier defines the general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code.
Note: If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix TESS application, this parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature. This is because the hand-held performs the strip function before it processes the data through the AIAG feature; if the prefix is stripped, the data is not identified as AIAG.
Error Accept
If the “Err Accept” and “AIAG Strip” parameters are enabled, all label data without an
AIAG identifier character is accepted. If the “Err Accept” parameter is disabled and the
“AIAG Strip” parameter is enabled, the label data is not accepted.
MOD Checks
This parameter allows you to choose the check digit calculated:
MOD 43 Check, MOD 10
Check
or
None
.
C-56 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
Code 128
• Double-tap on
MOD Checks
to display your options.
• Tap on a check digit to highlight it, and tap on
OK
.
If you choose
None
, a check is not executed.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.3
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 128”.
Include Sym
Setting “Include Sym” to
on
causes the group separator(s) and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the screen.
Note: This option is available only when ‘EAN/UCC 128’ is selected.
Variations
When using Code 128, you can choose the bar code variation the scanner will recognize.
The options available are Standard, UCC 128 and EAN/UCC 128.
• Double-tap on
Variations
to display a dialog box listing your options.
• Tap on a variation to highlight it, and then tap on
OK
.
If you choose
None
, a check is not executed.
Standard
Enable
Standard
if “Code 128” is desired.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-57
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
EAN 13
UCC 128
UCC 128
is a variation of “Code 128”.
EAN/UCC 128
To successfully scan this type of bar code, “EAN/UCC 128” must be enabled. “EAN/UCC” bar codes include group separators and start codes.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.4
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 13”.
Enable Bookland EAN
Setting this parameter to
on
allows your scanner to recognize Bookland EAN bar codes.
Include Country
If this parameter is enabled, the country code is included with the decoded bar code data.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Addendum
Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter (see
C-58 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
EAN 8
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored.
• Double-tap on
Addendum
to display a dialog box listing your options.
• Highlight an item, and tap on
OK
.
When “Addendum” is set to
Disabled
the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to
Optional
the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to
Required
the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum.
Note: Setting Addendum to Optional will reduce performance. This value should only be used if some bar codes actually have addendums.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.5
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 8”.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Addendum
Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter (see
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-59
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
UPC A
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.6
UPC A
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC A”.
Include Number Sys
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data.
Addendum
Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter (see
Refer to “Addendum” on page C-58.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.7
UPC E
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC E”.
C-60 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
Codabar
Convert to UPC-A
Setting this parameter to
on
results in a non-standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code.
Include Number Sys
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Include Check
When enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Addendum
Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter (see
Refer to “Addendum” on page C-58.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.8
Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Codabar”.
Strip Start/Stop Chars
Codabar uses the characters A, B, C, and D as start and stop characters. Thus, the first and last digits of a Codabar message must be A, B, C, or D, and the body of the message should not contain these characters. Setting this parameter to
on
strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-61
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
Code 93
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.9
Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 93”.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.10 Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 11”.
Include Check
If “Include Check” is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Check Digits
This parameter can be set to None, One Check Digit or Two Check Digits.
• Double-tap on this parameter to display a dialog box listing your options.
C-62 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
Interleaved 2 of 5
• Highlight the check digit you want to use, and tap on
OK
.
If this parameter set to
One Check Digit
, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit.
If this parameter is set to
Two Check Digits
, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.11 Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
MOD 10 Check
If this parameter is enabled, the “MOD 10” check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 MOD 10 check digit.
ITF Check
If this parameter is enabled, the ITF-14/16 MOD 10 check digit is calculated.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-63
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
MSI Plessey
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.12 MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “MSI Plessey”.
One Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.13 Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
MOD 10 Check
If this parameter is enabled, the MOD 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 MOD 10 check digit.
ITF Check
If this parameter is enabled, the ITF-14/16 MOD 10 check digit is calculated.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
C-64 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix C: Bar Code Settings
Non-Decoded Scanners
IATA 2 of 5
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
C.5.14 IATA 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “IATA 2 of 5”.
MOD 10 Check
If this parameter is enabled, the MOD 10 check digit is calculated.
ITF Check
If this parameter is enabled, the ITF-14/16 MOD 10 check digit is calculated.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data.
Transmit Code ID Char
A code ID character identifies the scanned bar code type. In addition to any single character prefix already selected, the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol.
Length Restriction
Refer to “Length Restriction” on page C-14 for details.
Add/Remove Data
Refer to “Add/Remove Data” on page C-14 for details.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual C-65
A
PPENDIX
D
T
EKLOGIX
I
MAGERS
A
PPLET
D.1 Required Applets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D.2 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D.2.1 Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D.2.2 Bar Code Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
D.2.2.1 Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . D-6
D.2.3 Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.2.4 Image Capture Predefined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
D.3 Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D.3.1 Configuring the Image Capture Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8
D.3.2 Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.3.3 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.3.4 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
D.3.5 Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.3.6 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
D.3.7 Removing a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
D.4 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
D.4.1 Selecting a Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
D.4.2 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
D.4.3 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
D.4.4 Creating a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D.4.5 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
D.4.6 Removing a Custom Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
D.4.7 Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16
D.4.8 Setting the Active Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
D.4.9 Viewing a Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
D.4.10 Creating a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18
D.4.11 Modifying a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
D.4.12 Removing a Custom Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
D.4.13 Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-20
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-1
D.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-20
D.4.14.1 Modifying a Bar Code Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-21
D.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-22
D.4.16 Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-23
D.4.16.1 File Locations for Captured Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-23
D.4.16.2 Configuring Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-24
D.5 Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-25
D.5.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-25
D.5.2 Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-26
D.5.3 Trioptic Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-27
D.5.4 Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-27
D.5.5 EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-28
D.5.6 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-28
D.5.7 UPC-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-29
D.5.8 UPC-E Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-30
D.5.9 UPC/EAN Shared Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-30
D.5.10 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-31
D.5.11 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-31
D.5.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-32
D.5.13 Code 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-32
D.5.14 Interleaved 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-33
D.5.15 Matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-33
D.5.16 IATA 2 of 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-33
D.5.17 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-34
D.5.18 Telepen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-34
D.5.19 GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-34
D.5.20 Posi Code (Reduced Space Symbology). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-35
D.5.21 Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-35
D.5.22 TLC-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-35
D.5.23 2D PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-36
D.5.24 2D Micro PDF-417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-36
D.5.25 Code 16K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-36
D.5.26 Code 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-36
D.5.27 Codablock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-37
D.5.28 2D Data Matrix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-37
D.5.29 2D QR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-37
D-2 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
D.5.30 2D Maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
D.5.31 2D Aztec. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
D.5.32 Postal: PlaNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-38
D.5.33 Postal: PostNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
D.5.34 Postal: Australian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
D.5.35 Postal: Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
D.5.36 Postal: China. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
D.5.37 Postal: Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
D.5.38 Postal: Kix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
D.5.39 Postal: Korean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-39
D.5.40 Postal: Royal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-40
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-3
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Required Applets
The
Teklogix Imagers
applet is used to create, modify, delete, and activate imager settings.
The principal uses of the application are to decode bar codes and to capture images. This imager services application is used for cameras and imagers to configure linear (1D), stacked linear, matrix (true 2D) and postal bar codes. A
Demonstration Application
is pro-
vided to demonstrate how the imager works. Refer to “Demo” on page 65 for details.
D.1
Required Applets
In order to configure imaging, the
Manage Triggers
applet must be present in the Control
Panel, along with the
Teklogix Imagers
applet.
Note: The Teklogix Imagers icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii. If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present, additional software (ICS) may need to be installed.
To enable a newly-installed imager, press and hold down the [FN] key and the
[ENTER/Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
D.2
Presets
There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the
Teklogix Imagers
applet:
• Use a predefined preset.
• Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset.
Important: It is strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible. Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment. In almost all situations, at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome.
A
preset
is a group of exposure and image correction settings. Each preset configures the imager for a specific purpose such as bar code decoding or image capture.
Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager after power-on or resume from suspend.
The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements. A custom preset can be created for a specific user application, such as: include only specified bar codes, read only a specified number of bar codes or for reading unusual media.
Every preset belongs to a preset type. The following preset types are available:
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-5
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Predefined Presets
• Imaging for photo capture.
• Imaging for bar code decoding.
• Symbology selection.
At any time, only one preset of each type can be designated as the user-selected
active
preset.
D.2.1
Predefined Presets
Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed. The predefined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous variables. In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient.
D.2.2
Bar Code Predefined Presets
These presets encompass the majority of the most popular bar codes and their subtypes. The
bar code decoding symbology
predefined presets define which bar codes can be decoded.
The
bar code decoding camera
predefined presets determine how the bar code images are captured.
D.2.2.1 Bar Code Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets
The following presets select groups of similar bar codes for decoding.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Factory Default
This preset enables the decoding of frequently used bar codes.
My Default
This preset uses the
Symbology Settings
menu to define the preset. For details about the
Symbology Settings
menu, refer to “Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies” on page
All
This preset enables the decoding of all bar codes that the imager can decode.
Linear
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode.
D-6 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
Linear and PDF417
This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode.
Matrix
This preset enables the decoding of all 2D symbologies that the imager can decode.
Postal
This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode.
D.2.3
Bar Code Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
The following presets enable successful bar code image capture in almost all conditions.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting
(about 300 Lux).
Low light
This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low, or inside an unlit truck. This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain.
Low power
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the handheld.
Glossy surface
This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection. This preset is used to read bar codes that are behind glass, or inside the plastic window of an envelope.
D.2.4
Image Capture Predefined Presets
The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions.
Note: It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-7
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet
Default
This preset works in a wide range of conditions. It is optimized for a normal office lighting
(about 300 Lux).
Motion
This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion.
Low light near
This preset is designed for dark conditions, it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash.
D.3
Using the Teklogix Imagers Applet
D.3.1
Configuring the Image Capture Presets
To configure the image capture presets, open the dialog box as follows:
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Control Panel
.
• Tap on the
Teklogix Imagers
icon, and if it’s not already selected, tap on the
Imaging
tab.
The following screen is displayed.
D-8 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Figure D.1 Imaging Tab
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Selecting a Camera
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and custom. Presets are identified as follows:
• Predefined presets are marked as ‘R’
read-only
.
• Custom presets are marked as ‘RW’
read and write
.
• One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as ‘A’
active
.
D.3.2
Selecting a Camera
To select a camera:
• Tap on the
Camera Presets
drop-down menu to view the camera options.
• Choose a
camera
—specifically,
Front Imager
which is located at the top of the unit.
D.3.3
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an
A
to the right. To set an active preset:
• Highlight the preset, and tap on the
Activate
button.
D.3.4
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the
View
button.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-9
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating a Custom Preset
The associated preset window is displayed.
• Tap on the + sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
D.3.5
Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the
Add
button.
A screen like the sample below is displayed.
• Type the
name
of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on
OK
to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.
D-10 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
D.3.6
Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
• Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the
Edit
button.
• Tap on the
+
symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
• For a parameter that can take a
range
of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the
[SPACE]
key or double-click on the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-11
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as
on
or
off
and
enabled
or
disabled
:
- Highlight the parameter and then press the
[SPACE]
key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on
OK
.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
• Tap on
OK
to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
D.3.7
Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the
Remove
button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
• Tap on
Yes
to remove the preset or
No
to cancel the operation.
D.4
Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Camera Presets
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets:
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Control Panel>Teklogix Imagers
.
• Tap on the
Barcoding
tab.
Figure D.2 Bar Code Presets
D-12 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Selecting a Camera
This window lists all the presets, both predefined and the custom. Presets are identified as follows:
•
• Predefined presets are marked as ‘R’
read-only
.
• Custom presets are marked as ‘RW’
read and write
.
• One preset—either predefined or custom—is marked as ‘A’
active
.
Note: The top portion of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.
The top port of the window displays the bar code decoding camera presets.
D.4.1
Selecting a Camera
To select a camera:
• Tap on the
Camera Presets
drop-down menu to view the camera options.
• Choose a
camera
—specifically,
Front Imager
which is located at the top of the unit.
D.4.2
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an
A
to the right; in Figure D.3 on page 16, the active preset is
Default
.
To set an active preset:
• Highlight the preset, and tap on the
Activate
button.
D.4.3
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the
View
button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-13
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating a Custom Preset
• Tap on the
+
sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
D.4.4
Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the
Add
button.
A screen like the sample following is displayed.
• Type the
name
of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on
OK
to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.
D-14 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
D.4.5
Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
• Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the
Edit
button.
• Tap on the
+
symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
• For a parameter that can take a
range
of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the
[SPACE]
key or double-click the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as
on
or
off
and
enabled
or
disabled
:
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-15
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
- Highlight the parameter and then press the
[SPACE]
key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on
OK
.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
• Tap on
OK
to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
D.4.6
Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the
Remove
button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
• Tap on
Yes
to remove the preset or
No
to cancel the operation.
D.4.7
Configuring the Bar Code Decoding Symbologies
To configure the bar code decoding camera presets:
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Control Panel>Teklogix Imagers
.
• Tap on the
Barcoding
tab.
Figure D.3 Viewing Bar Code Decoding Symbologies
D-16 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Setting the Active Preset
D.4.8
Setting the Active Preset
An active preset has an
A
to the right; in Figure D.3 on page 16, the active preset is
Default
.
To set an active preset:
• Highlight the preset, and tap on the
Activate
button.
D.4.9
Viewing a Preset
To view the parameter settings in a preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the
View
button.
The associated preset window is displayed.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-17
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Creating a Custom Preset
• Tap on the + sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings.
D.4.10 Creating a Custom Preset
A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset—either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset. To create a custom preset:
• Highlight a preset, and tap on the
Add
button.
A screen like the sample following is displayed.
• Type the
name
of the new preset in the dialog box.
• Tap on
OK
to save your changes.
The preset list is displayed; the new custom preset appears at the end of the list. It is marked as read and write.
D-18 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Modifying a Custom Preset
D.4.11 Modifying a Custom Preset
The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified. It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset. To ensure that it will work reliably, it should be as close as possible to the original predefined preset. To change a parameter value:
• Highlight the custom preset, and tap on the
Edit
button.
• Tap on the
+
symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
• For a parameter that can take a
range
of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the
[SPACE]
key or double-click the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
• For a parameter that toggles between two values such as
on
or
off
and
enabled
or
disabled
:
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-19
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Removing a Custom Preset
- Highlight the parameter and then press the
[SPACE]
key, or double-click on the parameter. Either method toggles between the two available values.
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on
OK
.
The parameter list is displayed; the new value for the changed parameter is shown.
• Tap on
OK
to exit to the preset list and save the changes.
D.4.12 Removing a Custom Preset
• Highlight the custom preset you want to delete, and tap on the
Remove
button.
A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset.
• Tap on
Yes
to remove the preset or
No
to cancel the operation.
D.4.13 Bar Coding Tab – Configuring Symbologies
To
view
the
Symbology Settings
options:
• Tap on the
Barcoding
tab, tap on
All
and then double-tap the
View
button.
To
edit
a default preset, you must first
activate
it:
• Tap on
My Default
, and tap on the
Activate
button – an
A
appears to the right of
My Default
.
Once the preset is activated, you can enable or disable the bar codes the imager will read.
• Highlight
My Default
in the
Barcoding
tab.
• Double-tap on the
Edit
button.
None of the other bar code decoding predefined presets are changed.
D.4.13.1 Symbology Settings
Note: For descriptions of the bar code symbologies, review “Bar Code Symbologies –
D.4.14 Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
To configure rules for manipulating bar code data:
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Control Panel
.
• Tap on the
Teklogix Imagers
icon, and then tap on the
Filter
tab.
D-20 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Filter Tab – Manipulating Bar Code Data
D.4.14.1 Modifying a Bar Code Setting
The rules for manipulating data from selected bar code symbologies can be modified. To change the settings for a symbology:
• Tap on the
+
symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings.
• Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change.
• For a parameter that can take a
range
of values:
- Highlight the parameter, and then press the
[SPACE]
key or double-click the parameter.
- An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed.
- Type a value in the field provided.
• For a parameter that takes a single character:
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-21
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Translation Tab – Configuring Rules
- Highlight the parameter and then press the
[SPACE]
key, or double-click the parameter. The following screen is displayed:
• When you’ve completed your edits, tap on
OK
.
D.4.15 Translation Tab – Configuring Rules
Translation rules enable the automatic processing of bar code data. Up to 10 cases can be defined, each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules.
Note: Changes made to the translations configuration using the Teklogix Scanner Control Panel program are synchronized with changes made here. Changes made in either place affect both translation tables.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Control Panel
.
• Tap on the
Teklogix Imagers
icon, and then tap on the
Translations
tab.
For instructions on adding, editing, and removing translation rules, refer to “Translations
D-22 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Advanced Tab
D.4.16 Advanced Tab
D.4.16.1 File Locations for Captured Images
To configure the location for saved images, open the dialog box as follows:
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Control Panel
.
• Tap on the
Teklogix Imagers
icon, and then tap on the
Advanced
tab.
To define the location where imager files will be stored:
• Tap on the
File Location
button.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-23
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Advanced Tab
• Type the file
Name
, choose the
Folder
and file
Type
.
• Choose the
Location
in which your files will be saved.
• When you have completed all the changes, tap on the
Save
button.
D.4.16.2 Configuring Triggers
Viewing the Trigger Configuration
The trigger on Omnii is configured using the
Manage Triggers
applet. The
Teklogix Imagers
applet provides a shortcut to the
Manage Triggers
applet.
• In the
Advanced
tab, tap on the
Trigger Control
button.
• To view all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them, tap in the checkbox next to
Show all modules
.
D-24 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Options
Adding, Editing and Removing Triggers
For instruction about adding, editing and removing triggers, refer to “Manage Triggers” on page 104.
D.5
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
To
view
all symbologies available for the imager:
• Tap on the
Barcoding
tab, and tap on
All
.
Note: Remember that if you want to
edit
the symbologies, the preset you want to change must be active. Highlight the
preset
you want to edit, and tap on the
Activate
button – an
A
is added at the far right of the preset. With the activated preset highlighted, double-tap on the
Edit
button.
D.5.1
Options
Auto Retry On Failed Decode Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
allows the imager to repeat the image capture attempt if the initial attempt fails. The number of retries is dependent on the value assigned in the next parameter,
Max Number of Auto Retry
. If this parameter is set to
off
, the imager will only attempt the image capture once.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-25
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Code 39
Max Number of Auto Retry
The value assigned for this parameter governs the number of times the imager will attempt to capture a bar code if the first attempt fails to a maximum of
99
times.
Decoder Timeout
This parameter determines the maximum time that the decoder will spend searching for barcode on captured image. The value assigned here is dependent on the type of bar code and quality of the image being capture. For example, the value may need to be increased to compensate for larger bar codes with more data encoded or for poor quality images. On the other hand, the value can be decreased for smaller, good quality images. The allowable value ranges from 200 to 500 msec.
Single Target Mode Enabled
When this parameter is enabled, the decoder assumes that a single bar code exists in the image and that it is located in the centre of the image.
Add AIM ID Prefix
The
AIM ID
(Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility) is an international bar code identifier. When this parameter is enabled, the
AIM ID
is inserted at the beginning of the decoded bar code.
D.5.2
Code 39
Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
makes “Code 39” readable to the imager.
Full ASCII
If this parameter is enabled, the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent
ASCII character.
Start/Stop Strip
“Code 39” has start/stop patterns that can be output as ASCII characters in the output data.
When
Start/Stop Strip
is enabled, start/stop characters are not output.
Check Char
When this parameter is enabled, before data is output, the “Code 39” symbol integrity is verified based on a parity character that must be present in the code. If the parity character is not
D-26 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Trioptic Code
part of the code, the code is not output. Keep in mind the parity character may not be part of your output setup; in this case, this parameter should be turned
off
.
Check Char Strip
If this parameter is set to
on
, check characters – if present – are not output.
Concatenation
When
Concatenation
is set to
on
, all decoded “Code 39” symbols with a SPACE as the first data character are concatenated to the internal buffer. Data from the last “Code 39” symbol
without
a SPACE is added to the buffer as well, and the entire buffer will be output.
Pharmaceutical
This is a numeric (0-9) fixed length barcode used by Italian pharmacies. It is also referred to as Code 32 Pharmacode and is a form of Code 39.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays screens in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
0 to 48.
D.5.3
Trioptic Code
Note: “Trioptic Code” and “Full ASCII” should not be enabled simultaneously. The scanner does not automatically discriminate between these two symbologies.
Enable
Trioptic Code
symbols always contain six characters. Setting this parameter to
on
allows this type of symbology to be recognized.
D.5.4
Code 128
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 128”.
ISBT Concatenation
These codes are not concatenated by default. You need to set this parameter to
on
to send concatenated code.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-27
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
EAN 13
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays screens in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
0 to 80.
D.5.5
EAN 13
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 13”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements
are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to
on
, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a supplement.
Supplements Separator
A
Supplements Separator
is a space that is added between the EAN 13 bar code and the
Supplement code/Addenda.
ISBN Translate
When this parameter (International Standard Book Number) is enabled, the first 3 characters
(‘978’) are ignored and the checksum (0.9, ‘X’) is calculated on the remaining characters.
D.5.6
EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “EAN 8”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
D-28 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
UPC-A
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements
are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to
on
, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a supplement.
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator
is a space that is added between the EAN 8 bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
D.5.7
UPC-A
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC-A”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit, if present, is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements
are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to
on
, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a supplement.
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator
is a space that is added between the UPC-A bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-29
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
UPC-E Settings
D.5.8
UPC-E Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “UPC E”.
Enabled UPC-E1
Set this parameter to on to allow “UPC-E1” (zero suppressed) bar code scans.
Expand
This parameter expands the UPC-E code to a 12 digit UPC-A format.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Number System
If this parameter is enabled, the number system digit is transmitted with the decoded bar code data.
Supplements 2 and Supplements 5
Supplements
are additions to EAN/UPC codes. These addendums can be 2 or 5 characters in length. Usually, data from an addendum is a suffix to the main symbol output data.
Mandatory Enabled
When this parameter is set to
on
, the imager does not accept the main bar code without a supplement.
Supplements Separator
Supplements Separator
is a space that is added between the UPC-E bar code and the Supplement code/Addenda.
D.5.9
UPC/EAN Shared Settings
Extended Coupon Code
This parameter specifies whether or not the imager will read only UPC-A/EAN-13 bar codes that have addenda.
Note: The 2 or 5 digit addenda must be turned on/off, depending on the desired behavior.
D-30 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Code 93
D.5.10 Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 93”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
0 to 80.
D.5.11 Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Codabar”.
Start/Stop Strip
Codabar can use the following sets of characters as start and stop characters: a, b, c, d
A, B, C, D a, b, c, d, /, t, n, *, e
DC1, DC2, DC3, DC4
Setting this parameter to
on
strips the start and stop characters from this bar code.
Check Char
When this parameter is enabled, before data is output, the “Codabar” symbol integrity is verified based on a parity character that must be present in the code. If the parity character is not part of the code, the code is not output. Keep in mind the parity character may not be part of your output setup; in this case, this parameter should be turned
off
.
Check Char Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check character is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Concatenation
“Codabar” supports symbol concatenation. When
Concatenation
is set to
on
, Codabar uses a
‘D’ stop character to indicate that data from that symbol should be concatenated with data from the adjacent symbol with a ‘D’ start character.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-31
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
MSI Plessey
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
2 to 60.
D.5.12 MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable MSI.
Enable Plessey
Set this parameter to on to enable Plessey.
Check Char
When this parameter is set to
on
, the integrity of a “MSI Plessey” symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
4 to 48.
Plessey Minimum and Plessey Maximum Length
These parameters apply to Plessey bar codes.The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
4 to 48.
D.5.13 Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 11”.
Check Digits
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can choose
One Check
Digit
or
Two check digits
.
If this parameter is set to
One Check Digit
, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If it is set to
Two Check Digits
, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits.
D-32 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Interleaved 2 of 5
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 80.
D.5.14 Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Interleaved 2 of 5”.
Check Char
When this parameter is set to on, the integrity of a “Interleaved 2 of 5” symbol is checked to ensure that it complies with specified algorithms.
Check Char Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check character is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
2 to 80.
D.5.15 Matrix 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Matrix 2 of 5”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 80.
D.5.16 IATA 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “IATA 2 of 5”.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-33
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Discrete 2 of 5
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 48.
D.5.17 Discrete 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Discrete 2 of 5”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 48.
D.5.18 Telepen
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Telepen”.
Enable AIM Output
If you set
Enable AIM
Output to
on
, the imager reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and decodes them as standard full ASCII (start/stop pattern 1). If you set this parameter to
off
, the imager reads symbols with start/stop pattern 1 and decodes them as compressed numeric with optional full ASCII (start/stop pattern 2).
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 60.
D.5.19 GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar
Set this parameter to
on
to enable the imager to read “GS1 Databar” symbols.
D-34 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Posi Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
4 to 74.
D.5.20 Posi Code (Reduced Space Symbology)
Enable
Setting this parameter to
on
enables “Posi Code” scanning capability.
Enable Limited A and Enable Limited B
“PosiCode” is a “position” based symbology. A position based symbology de-couples the widths of the bars from their positions. The centers of the bars are specified to be laid out on a grid of equally spaced parallel lines. The distance between these grid lines is called the Gdimension and is analogous to the X-dimension of conventional bar codes.
There are two variations of this code:
Posi Code A
, and
Posi Code B
.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
2 to 80.
D.5.21 Composite
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Composite” bar codes.
Important: To successfully read this type of bar code, the two types of symbologies included in a composite bar code must be enabled.
D.5.22 TLC-39
This composite component integrates MicroPDF417 with the linear code.
Enabled
Setting this parameter to
on
enables this parameter.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-35
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
2D PDF-417
D.5.23 2D PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D PDF-417”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 2750.
D.5.24 2D Micro PDF-417
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D Micro PDF-417”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 366.
D.5.25 Code 16K
The “Code 16K” bar code is a multiple-row bar code that can encode the full ASCII character set below ASCII 128. It uses existing UPC and Code 128 character set patterns. Up to 77 full ASCII characters or 154 numeric characters can be encoded into 2 to 16 rows. Each row is divided by a separator bar. The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones.
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 16K”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 160.
D.5.26 Code 49
The “Code 49” bar code is a multiple-row bar code that can encode the full ASCII character set below ASCII 128. Up to 49 alphanumeric characters or 81 numeric characters can be
D-36 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Codablock
encoded into two to eight rows. Each row is divided by a separator bar. The top and bottom of the symbol also have separator bars that extend to the ends of the minimum quiet zones.
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Code 49”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 81.
D.5.27 Codablock
Enable
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Codablock”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 2048.
D.5.28 2D Data Matrix
Enable
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D Data Matrix”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 1500.
D.5.29 2D QR Code
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D QR Code”.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-37
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
2D Maxicode
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 3500.
D.5.30 2D Maxicode
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D Maxicode”.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 150.
D.5.31 2D Aztec
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “2D Aztec”.
Aztec Runes
Aztec Runes, the smallest type of Aztec Code symbol, has the ability to encode a very short license plate message.
Minimum and Maximum Length
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s). Double-tapping on these parameters displays a screen in which you can set the minimum and maximum allowable code lengths –
1 to 3750.
D.5.32 Postal: PlaNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: PlaNET”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
D-38 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Postal: PostNET
D.5.33 Postal: PostNET
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: PostNET”.
Check Digit Strip
If you enable this parameter, a check digit is stripped from the decoded bar code data.
D.5.34 Postal: Australian
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Australian”.
D.5.35 Postal: Canadian
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Canadian”.
D.5.36 Postal: China
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: China”.
D.5.37 Postal: Japanese
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Japanese”.
D.5.38 Postal: Kix
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Kix”.
D.5.39 Postal: Korean
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Korean”.
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual D-39
Appendix D: Teklogix Imagers Applet
Bar Code Symbologies – Descriptions
Postal: Royal
D.5.40 Postal: Royal
Enabled
Set this parameter to
on
to enable “Postal: Royal”.
D.5.41 VeriCode
®
Enabled
VeriCode is a 2D omni-directional symbol. To read this symbol, set this parameter to
on
.
D-40 Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
I
NDEX
Numbers
2D Aztec
2D Data Matrix
2D PDF-417
2D QR Code
2D UPC Half Block Stitching
36-key keyboard alpha keys, accessing
uppercase letters, creating
5080 imager specifications
7545 Model
802.11b/g radio configuring
AGPS (Assisted Global Positioning
All
Predefined preset
appearance (display colour scheme)
appending to bar codes
approvals, Omnii (including scanner)
arrow keys
ASCII
audio indicators
description of beep conditions
Auto Exposure (Imager)
A
accessories carrying case
Addendum Add-on 2
Addendum Add-on 5
Addendum Security
Add Remove Data (bar code scanning)
Suffix Char
Administrator Password (PsionVU
B
background, choosing for Desktop
background image (display scheme)
backlight
backup Profile (Total Recall)
Bad Scan Vibrates
bar code
decoding edge-to-edge
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
I
II
Index
Decoding symbology predefined
displaying type of bar code
parameters
symbologies
Code 11
Code 128
IATA 2 of 5
MSI Plessey
UPC A
bar code reader
integrated scanner, operation of
internal or integrated
battery
charging with desktop docking station
contact pinout
installing
power saving suspend dialog box
replacing
taskbar icon
beeper
description of beep conditions
Bi-Direction Redundancy
Bluetooth
radio
peripherals
setup
BooST menu
bootloader menu
Bright For (backlight)
C
calibrating touchscreen
camera
case, carrying
chargers
indicators
safety instructions
Check Digit
Check Digit Verification
Check Digit Verification (Codabar)
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5)
Click Data
Click Time
(scanner double-click)
CLSI Library System
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Codablock
Code 11
Code 128
Code 32, Convert To
Code 32 Prefix
Composite
computer hardware properties
Concatenation
console (bootloader)
Continuous Scan Mode
Control Panel accessing
power management properties
stylus properties
Control Panel Settings (PsionVU settings)
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A
Convert To UPC -A
CTRL Key
cycle tasks
D
Data Bits
decoded (internal) scanner parameters
decoded Intermec (ISCP) parameters
Decode Performance
decoding bar codes
Security
Demo
Sound
desktop connection, remote
desktop docking station
See docking sta-
desktop shell appearance
dialog box, using
digit check digit
Discrete 2 of 5
dismounting partitions
display
indicators
operation
operator controls
installation at site
uploading data using
Dot Time
double-click appending characters to a decoded
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Index
III
IV
Index
scanner trigger
Double-Click, Manage Triggers menu
E
EAN 13
Enable AIM Output
(Telepen)
Enable Bookland (UPC-EAN)
Enable CC-C
Enable Plessy
Enable RSS Expanded
Enable RSS Limited
Enable TLC-39
EV15 1D imager scanner specifications
F
Factory Defaults On Reboot
Fast Converge (Imager)
formatting
partitions
FTP Server, TweakIT
Full ASCII, Code 39 imager bar code
Function Keys
G
Glossy surface
Good Scan Vibrates
GPRS (
Bluetooth
GPS Settings (built-in profiles)
GS1-128
GS1-128 Identifier
H
hand strap, installing
hard reset
headsets, pairing (
Bluetooth
I
IATA 2 of 5
Identifier, Default preset group (imaging
IEEE radio, configuring
Imager
imager
Import/Export to File (PsionVU settings)
Include Check
Include Check (Discrete 2 of 5 symbology)
Include Check (Interleaved 2 of 5
Include Chk
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Include Number Sys
Include Sym (Code 128)
indicators
scanner message
Ingenuity (PsionVU Shell), settings
input panel
Microsoft Control Panel
installation
integrated scanner option
Interleaved 2 of 5
Inverse Video Mode
IPv6, TweakIT
ISBN Conversion
ISBT 128
ISM band,
Bluetooth
ITF Check (Discrete 2 of 5 symbology)
ITF Check (I 2 of 5 symbology)
ITF Check (IATA 2 of 5 symbology)
K
keyboard
keyboard, onscreen
keyboard backlight
ALT
DEL
ESC
navigating using the keyboard
SHIFT
Key Repeat tab
keys
L
Laser On Time
LED charge
Length Restriction (bar code scanning)
Field Size
Minimum Size
Linear
Predefined preset
Linear and PDF
Predefined preset
Linear Transmission only (Decoded
Linear Transmission only (TLC-39)
Lithium-ion batteries
Low light
Predefined preset
Low light near
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Index
V
VI
Index
Low power
M
Macro keys
accessing
executing a macro
Matrix
Matrix 2 of 5
Maximum Length
Max Integration (Imager)
memory card
messages
microphone adjustments
microphone gain adjustment
Microsoft SIP
Minimum Size
Mobile Device Center (Windows), setting
Mod 10 Check (Discrete 2 of 5 symbology)
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Mod 10 Check (I 2 of 5 symbology)
Mod 43 Check
modifier key
modifier keys
locking
unlocking
Motion
mounting partitions
N
network connection, monitoring
NOTIS Editing
Number System
O
Omnii
One Check Digit
one dimensional internal scanner
One Shot Mode
ON For
onscreen keyboard
Microsoft SIP
P
pairing
Bluetooth
devices
C-28, C-29, C-32, C-33, C-34, C-35,
partitions
formatting
mounting
PDF and linear
Plessey Minimum Length
Port Replicator Port A (COM5
)
Port Replicator Port A (COM5) settings
Port Replicator Port settings
ports
parameters
Posi Code
Postal
Canadian
China
Korean
PlaNET
Royal
Power Management Properties
Power Mode
Decoded (Internal)
Scanner
Linear and PDF
Matrix
Postal
Predefined Presets, imaging software
Preset (imaging software)
Custom
Group
Preset Group, Default identifier (imaging
Profile
restoring backup
Programs
Windows Explorer
protective case
PsionVU settings
Restrictions
Shell Settings
punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT
Index
R
radio
Bluetooth
specifications
Raster Expand Rate
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
VII
VIII
Index
Remote Desktop Connection
Repeat Delay (between key repeats)
Repeat Rate (of key repeats)
Repeat tab (key repeat settings)
resetting Omnii
cold reset
hard reset
Restrictions (PsionVU settings)
S
safety instructions
SCAN Key
scanner
2D Maxicode
Addendum
aiming dot duration
appending data
Bad Scan Vibrates
bar code, appending data to
bar code applications
Check Digit
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Check Digit Verification
CLSI Editing
Codabar
Code 128
Code 32 Prefix
Continuous Scan Mode
Conv. UPC-E1 To UPC-A
decoded (internal)
decoded Intermec (ISCP)
Delete Char Set ECIs
Enable CC-C
Enable RSS Expanded
Enable RSS Limited
Enable TLC-39
Factory Defaults On Reboot
Good Scan Beep
imager
Include Check Digit
Include Number Sys
Inverse Video Mode
ISBN Conversion
Linear Decode
Micro PDF-417
Minimum Cancel Time
One Check Digit
one dimensional (1D) internal scanner
Postal
PostNET
Royal
Raster Expand Rate
safety warnings
SE955 specifications
Short Code
Soft Scan Timeout
specifications, internal
Suffix
Supplementals
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)
Transmit Code 1D Char
screen
C-58, C-59, C-60, C-61, C-62, C-63,
UPC-E1 Check Digit
UPC-E1 Preamble
UPC-EAN
Window Height
Window Width
scanning
Check Digit Verification (I 2 of 5)
Code 128
Enable CC-C
Enable RSS Expanded
Enable RSS Limited
Linear Transmission only (Decoded
Composite)
Linear Transmission only (TLC-39)
safety instructions
UPC-EAN Shared Settings
Windows Embedded CE, navigating
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Index
IX
X
Index
Security
Security Level
Security Level (TLC-39)
Settings
Network and Dial-up connections
Shell Settings (PsionVU settings)
SHIFT Key
Shutdown
Snap Modules
ST3101 (power only)
ST4005 (USB DE9M)
SNTP, TweakIT
soft input panel
Microsoft Control Panel
SPACE Key
specifications
camera
EV15 1D imager
Standard (Code 128)
programs
Run
Settings
task manager
Strip Trailing
Stylus Properties
Double-tap (stylus sensitivity)
Suffix
Surface
Glossy
swap time (for battery)
Symbol
soft input panels figures
symbologies
symbologies, bar code
System Properties
system tray
T
target dot, duration of
taskbar onscreen indicators
battery
using
TekImager Enabled
Teklogix Imagers applet
Teklogix Imagers settings
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Total Recall
touchscreen
touch pen, using
Translations parameters (bar codes)
Transmit Check Digit (I 2 of 5)
Transmit Check Digit (MSI Plessey)
C-59, C-60, C-61, C-62, C-63, C-64,
trigger, double-click
trigger mappings
Trigger On Sequence
Trigger-Press Type, Manage Triggers
troubleshooting tips (scanning)
TweakIT
Advanced Interface and Network
Settings
TweakIT Settings
Advanced Interface and Network
UPC Half Block Stitching, 2D
V
Volume & Sounds Properties
W
Windows® Start Menu
See
Windows Embedded CE
files, folders, & programs, working
Windows Embedded CE, navigating in
Windows Mobile Device Center, setting up
Wireless Zero Config
U
UPC A
UPC-E1 Check Digit
UPC-EAN Shared Settings
Psion Teklogix Omnii XT10 Hand-Held Computer User Manual
Index
XI
Stáhnout
Veřejný odkaz aktualizován
Veřejný odkaz na váš chat byl aktualizován. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Veřejný odkaz na dokument
Reklama